Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
LIST OF DRAWINGS
CCTV System Layout – Level -3
CCTV System Layout – Level -2
CCTV System Layout – Level -1
CCTV System Layout – Level +0
CCTV System Layout – Level +1
CCTV System Layout – Level +2
CCTV System Layout – Level +3
CCTV System Layout – Level +4
43284-ELV-C-01
43284-ELV-C-02
43284-ELV-C-03
43284-ELV-C-04
43284-ELV-C-05
43284-ELV-C-06
43284-ELV-C-07
43284-ELV-C-08
*Note: An unlocked electronic version of the above drawings can be made available to the successful
Tenderer who is awarded the contract as detailed in the bill of quantities. These drawings would be
issued for the sole purpose of the preparation of ‘Installation’ and ‘As-fitted’ drawings of this particular
project and they are not to be transmitted or copied in any form to third parties without the written
permission of Mediterranean Technical Services Limited.
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
23
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
The Tenderer shall provide a list of all materials and equipment, the name of the manufacturer and
the type or model number (where applicable) of all the types he is proposing to use on the
installation.
Once accepted and the Contract signed, the Contractor shall be bound to supply and install the
material detailed in the list forming part of the Tender, subject to the written approval of the
Engineer, authorising alternative material/equipment.
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
1.
Internal 1.3Mp Dome Camera
2.
Internal 1.3Mp Dome Camera 360º
3.
External 2Mp Camera
4.
External 5Mp Camera
5.
Network Video Recorder
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
22
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Ltd
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Ltd
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Ltd
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Ltd
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
MTS Consulting Ltd
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Ltd
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
MTS Consulting Ltd
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Ltd
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Ltd
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Ltd
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Ltd
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Ltd
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
SECTION III – IP - C.C.T.V. SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE
The CCTV system is significant and important to enhance the security level inside the building.
For this reason, the CCTV system shall cover all the critical areas, which are deemed potential for
intrusion. The CCTV system is to be able to be viewed on the existing Control Room. The present
system is a combination of various technologies and integration is preferred to avoid multiple
additional screens at the main control room. The new system however should eventually replace
the existing system when all the CCTV is changed to one common platform / technology.
An additional monitor is also included in the system, with the existing two needed to be shifted
slightly to make space for the third monitor.
Existing system is based on Dedicated Micros Digital Sprite 2 recorders in conjunction with an
AnalyticsCapable SD Advanced recorder and controller.
2.0
GENERAL
The CCTV System shall consist of the following components:



Cameras,
Client View Station programs,
Mounting Hardware,
The Video System shall have the following architecture:
All control commands and Video shall be transmitted over the network using TCP/IP protocol.
Video temporarily and/or permanently saved shall be stored on one or more disk drives in the
security NVR’s, on board the cameras, or on other computers or storage devices with mapped
drives on the network.
The video system shall be scalable from one to hundreds of cameras. System administration
functions must be achieved from a web browser from either local or remote locations.
3.0
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
The NVR shall be Cat6 compatible and shall be integrated with the IP camera network to store
CCTV images. It shall be compatible with multiple brands of IP devices including Megapixel
cameras, IP IR cameras and IP Dome cameras.
System security administrator shall be able to view video surveillance data from any location
using a desktop computer, laptop, or PDA.
MTS Consulting Ltd
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
C43284
The NVR shall have the minimum features:
3.1
System




3.2
Monitoring






3.3




Minimum 4TB storage capacity
Powerful storage strategies, can allocate customised storage space /recording days to
any channel, and important images stored on selected arrays
Advance disk pre-allocation technologies to improve recording efficiency and reduce
disk fragment
Multi-zone motion detection recording with pre-event recording
Adjustable alarm recording quality, frame rate and resolution
Flexible recording schedule
Playback



4.0
Real-time monitoring
Group cycle view
Adaptation to different monitor resolution
Built-in PTZ control (for future use)
Drag camera window to re-arrange preview layout
Instant response modes, On monitoring, recording, PTZ preset reaction, audio,
SMS
Recording


3.4
Manage up to 32 channels, expandable
Dependable, robust and stable system with fully modulated design
Support multi stream transmission:
 Local stream for high definition central storage
 Alarm stream for customisation recording quality and frame rate on alarm
 Network stream for fluent remote access
Complete system and event log database
Min.36 channels time-line based synchronous playback
Support frame by frame playback
Multiple backup modes
COMMUNICATIONS FLEXIBILITY
The system shall support IP - Cameras that have IP addresses and are connected to the Network
via copper cable, fiber optic cable, wireless communication, satellite link, or any other means so
long as the protocol used is TCP/IP.
MTS Consulting Ltd
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, CCTV Systems
5.0
C43284
STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL
The system shall provide for two modes of video storage for each of the Cameras: time-based in
which video is continually stored, and event-based in which pre- and post-alarm video of a
configurable length can be captured upon alarm or other events.
Each camera’s stored video configuration must be set independently of other cameras.
Configuration choices must include storage frame rate that is independent of the view frame rate.
6.0
BANDWIDTH MANAGER
The system shall include the capability to limit Bandwidth Consumption on a per-camera basis as
well as to dynamically control aggregate bandwidth served onto the Network.
Bandwidth consumption must be adjustable remotely via browser.
The CCTV system shall be able to distinguish between LAN and WAN client addresses and
provide different frame rates to each of those.
7.0
IP- CAMERAS
The IP cameras shall be colour, suitable for external and internal applications, in the case of
external application the cameras shall be weather proof and vandal proof. In the event that the
camera is tempered with, the security staff shall be alerted through the proprietary software. All
cameras shall have power over Ethernet (POE) capabilities.
The IP Cameras shall have the minimum requirement:















MTS Consulting Ltd
High definition IP Camera - up to 2MP resolution as per Bill of Quantities
Available in static camera, internal mini-dome or Vandal Resistant Mini-dome options
External cameras to be complete with IP65, vandal proof housing with tamper alarm
Integrated Camera Recording and full enterprise video server within camera
Can form part of a Closed IPTV system
4CIF max resolution
Transmission of multiple, simultaneous video streams in MPEG-4, H.264 and JPEG
format enables multiple users to view video streams at the settings they require
Works with any DM Video Server that supports IP Streaming & Recording
MultiMode Recording - Dynamically-switchable resolution, record-rate & compression
(MPEG-4/H.264/JPEG) settings
Web server for remote configuration of camera features
PoE to IEEE802.3af
Local analogue test monitor output for use when positioning and adjusting the camera’s
field of view and focus
Integrated IR illuminator for external cameras
Multiple user access levels with password protection IP address filtering, HTTPS
encryption
Events triggered by built-in motion detection, external inputs or according to a schedule
15
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting and ELV Systems
C43284
LIST OF DRAWINGS
FIRE FIGHTING
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level -3
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level -2
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level -1
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level +0
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level +1
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level +2
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level +3
Fire Fighting System Layout – Level +4
43284-MECH-FF-01
43284-MECH-FF-02
43284-MECH-FF-03
43284-MECH-FF-04
43284-MECH-FF-05
43284 MECH-FF-06
43284-MECH-FF-07
43284-MECH-FF-08
ELV
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level -3
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level -2
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level -1
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level +0
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level +1
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level +2
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level +3
Fire Detection and Access Control – Level +4
43284-ELV-FD-01
43284-ELV-FD-02
43284-ELV-FD-03
43284-ELV-FD-04
43284-ELV-FD-05
43284-ELV-FD-06
43284-ELV-FD-07
43284-ELV-FD-08
*Note: An unlocked electronic version of the above drawings can be made available to the successful
Tenderer who is awarded the contract as detailed in the bill of quantities. These drawings would be
issued for the sole purpose of the preparation of ‘Installation’ and ‘As-fitted’ drawings of this particular
project and they are not to be transmitted or copied in any form to third parties without the written
permission of Mediterranean Technical Services Limited.
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
51
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
The Tenderer shall provide a list of all materials and equipment, the name of the manufacturer and the type
or model number (where applicable) of all the types he is proposing to use on the installation.Once accepted
and the Contract signed, the Contractor shall be bound to supply and install the material detailed in the list
forming part of the Tender, subject to the written approval of the Engineer, authorising alternative
material/equipment.
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
1.
Galvanised Steel Pipes
2.
Fire Fighting Cabinets
3.
Portable Fire Extinguishers
4.
Hose Reel Pumpset
5.
Landing Valves
6.
Breaching Inlet Cabinets
7.
Gas Suppression System
8.
Fire Alarm Control Panel
9.
Surge Protection Unit for Control
Panel
10.
Main Fire Alarm Bell
11.
Heat Detectors
12.
Optical Smoke Detector
13.
Sounder base
14.
Manual Call Point
15.
Beacon
16.
Interface
17.
Short Circuit Isolator
18.
Fire Cabling
19.
Card access management
controller
20.
Proximity card reader
21.
Access Control keypad
22.
Magnetic door open sensor
23.
Car Park Barrier
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
50
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Ltd
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Ltd
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Ltd
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Ltd
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
MTS Consulting Ltd
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Ltd
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
MTS Consulting Ltd
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Ltd
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Ltd
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Ltd
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Ltd
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Ltd
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION III – FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply, install, test and commission the fire fighting systems which shall consist of a number of
hose reels fed from a dedicated hose reel pump, one dry riser in the escape staircase, wet
system tap-off from existing fire system, and a number of fire extinguishers.
The hose reel system shall have its water supply fed from reservoir below level -3.
All pipework relating to the fire fighting systems shall be carried out using galvanized steel.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All pipework shall be blanked off during the course of the installation to prevent any ingress of dirt
or other material, which may otherwise block the pipe-work. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible to comply with this provision under all circumstances. Tube ends shall be cut square
and all burrs removed prior to cleaning ends for jointing in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Piping shall rise in the direction of flow to pre-determined high points, where
provision shall be made for automatic air vents.
3.0
PIPEWORK
All pipework is to be installed as indicated in the drawings.
Pipework is to be installed following manufacturers recommendations and shall be suitably
labelled.
3.1
Galvanised steel pipework
All the fire fighting pipe-work shall be in medium grade galvanised steel. The pipework
shall be accordingly labelled.
The galvanized steel shall comply with the following requirements:
-
-
MTS Consulting Ltd
Pipes shall conform to EN 10255
Pipes shall be laid in compliance with building requirements and in such a way not to
affect structures or piping systems or interfere with equipment of other plants. All
pipework shall be passed over false ceiling, or within service spaces, and drops to
the hose reels shall be within the building structure. Approval for routing of pipework
shall be co-ordinated with the builder and shall be approved by the architect.
Pipework shall be installed straight and parallel to other services routed adjacent.
Pipework shall have screwed joints with taper threads and made with an approved
jointing compound.
Spare outlets shall be blanked off.
Supports shall strictly follow manufacturer’s instructions.
All pipework shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer and one coat of glass
finish, in accordance with the relative B.S. or E.N. standard.
The dry riser shall be fitted with ½” automatic air vents and valve at their highest points
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Installation and workmanship, including pipe joining, pipe sleeves, brackets, fixtures,
labelling, painting, coding, testing and commissioning shall be executed to the highest
quality workmanship and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The pipe shall be routed within a dedicated sleeve, prepared by others.
4.0
FIRE HOSE REELS
A wet swinging type automatic hose reel system complying with BS530, part I complete with
necessary fittings, is to be provided as fixed first aid equipment to contain any eventual fire in its
initial stage.
The contractor shall confirm with the architect, left hand or right hand installation of each hose
reel to suit the particular location.
Fire hoses shall be 30m long with a 19mm internal bore, 1 inch external bore diameter, non-kink
reinforced type and be complete with a 6mm spray jet plastic nozzle. The hose shall be
2.
hydraulically tested to withstand 5000 KN/m The hose shall be mounted on a steel drum and
complete with a galvanised steel inlet pipe.
5.0
FIRE FIGHTING CABINETS
The cabinet shall be split in two compartments, the top for hose reel and the bottom for the 2No.
extinguishers. Hinges shall permit the door to open 180 degrees. Stainless steel or aluminium
trimmings shall have a brushed satin finish. All fire fighting cabinets shall be suitable for a
recessed installation. Specific information regarding the finish of the cabinet shall be provided by
the architect and as such final approval shall be given by the interior designer / architect.
5.1
Hose Reel Cabinet
Hose reel cabinets shown on drawings shall measure approximately 840mm wide x
1600mm high x 250mm deep, and shall be divided in two compartments: one
accommodating a hose reel and another accommodating two portable fire extinguishers.
Each hose cabinet shall have instruction plate on the inside to the effect that “in case of
fire pull hose from reel and water will turn on automatically: the nozzle should at all times
be left in the open position.”
Each hose cabinet shall be equipped with a 1” lock shield valve, with renewable disc and
sheet. The top compartment of the cabinet shall be of sufficient size to accommodate a
30 metre automatic fire hose reel, the reel drum being mounted on the inside of a pivoting
door to facilitate pull out.
The bottom compartment shall accommodate 2 portable fire extinguishers as specified
below:
Basement levels:
- 1 x 6 Litres FOAM
- 1 x 6kg CARBON DIOXIDE
MTS Consulting Ltd
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Other Areas:
- 1 x 6kg DRY POWDER
- 1 x 6kg CARBON DIOXIDE
Each compartment shall be conspicuously identified
‘EXTINGUISHERS’ as applicable in 50mm high lettering.
6.0
as
‘FIRE
HOSE’
or
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
These shall be of the lever operated type complete with safety-pin, which has to be pulled out
prior to discharge. The extinguishers shall have a controllable discharge and shall be fitted with a
pressure gauge and a ‘USED’ flag. The extinguishers shall carry the BS Kitemark to BS 5306
Part III or equivalent.
The fire extinguishers are to have the following capacities:



7.0
Dry Powder– 6kg
Foam – 6 Litres
CO2 – 6kgs
HOSE REEL PUMP SET
The hose reel fire pump shall be of the fully automatic packaged unit type consisting of two close
coupled pumps and pressure vessel, having a duty as specified, for each pump:
Flow rate:
150 litres/min
Head:
60 metres
The packaged unit shall include a pipeline pressure unit with flow switch, non-return valve, test
cock, pressure gauge and a pre-wired control panel, which gives automatic (and manual) changeover from ‘duty’ to ‘stand by’ pump, should the duty pump fail to deliver for any reason
whatsoever. The control panel shall also include a RUN and TRIP indicator and each of these
shall also have a NO VOLT CONTACT.
The pumps shall otherwise conform to the general pump specification. The assembly shall
include a flow switch which shall be interfaced to the fire alarm system by others.
The pump set shall have an output for the remote monitoring through BMS. In view of this, the
contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS installer/programmer prior to
ordering.
8.0
DRY RISER
The dry riser system shall be installed for use by the fire fighting brigade. An inlet breech for
connection by the fireman shall be located within the main entrance, as shown on the drawing.
Pipework shall consist of heavy gauge galvanised steel.
All termination points shall have landing valves as indicated in the drawing. Landing valves shall
be 2 ½”, with connection for couplings to BS336 (compatible with local fire brigade equipment).
The landing valves shall be installed in each level of the escape staircase.
MTS Consulting Ltd
15
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
9.0
C43284
FIRE HYDRANT
A 2½” lockable fire hydrant shall be placed along the façade of the building for firefighting use.
This shall be achieved by the use of the existing underground reservoir and fire pump in the
existing center. A 4” pipework shall be routed through the interconnecting tunnel to be built at
level -3. This will then feed the pipework supplying the hydrant along the façade of the new
center.
10.0
ACCESSORIES
10.1
Gate Valves
These shall be made from gunmetal with non-corrodible hand wheel. Pressed steel hand
wheels will not be accepted. Gate valves to BS 5154 PN 20 series B rated 20 Bar from 0
10 to 100 C. Non-rising stem type with threaded bonnet and one piece wedge. For
valves greater than 4”, cast iron valves shall be employed. These shall be to BS 5150
0
rated at 13.8 Bar from -10 to 65 C.
10.2
Check Valves
For sizes up to 3”, bronze check valves of the swing pattern type to BS 5154 PN 25
0
series B. These shall be rated at 25 Bar for temperatures -10 to 100 C and suitable for
mounting in horizontal and vertical (flow upwards) positions. Parts to be in gunmetal and
in brass. For sizes greater than 3”; cast iron check valves shall be supplied to BS 5153
PN 16.
10.3
Lock shield Valves
These shall have easy clean shields to match the shield or enclosure in the inlet valve.
Six loose keys shall be provided for each size of spindle. Where specified the lock shield
valve shall have characteristic discs as for regulating valves
10.4
Pressure Gauges
They are to be dial type, 100mm in diameter, and preceded by a shut off valve of
approved type, with ‘S’ pipe connection. Gauges shall be calibrated in metric units. They
shall be of good quality materials that withstand corrosion and clogging of indicator
handle. Gauges shall have 63mm dials (at least) and shall have a maximum read out of
6.0bars +/- 0.1bars.
10.5
Temperature Gauges
Thermometers complete with pockets shall be provided where shown on the schematic
drawing enclosed. They are to be of the dial type with reading scale in Deg. C. Gauges
are to have 63mm dials (at least) and shall have a temperature reading range between
o
o
o
0 C-60 C with an accuracy of +/- 1 C.
MTS Consulting Ltd
16
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
10.6
C43284
Automatic Air Vents
Automatic air vents shall be installed at all high points and sections in the pipework. The
type of vent that is to be used shall be either one of the following.
Automatic air vents, unless otherwise noted, shall have gunmetal bodies of not less than
15mm screwed connection, copper or stainless steel floats and guides and noncorrodible ball needle valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a
lock shield valve. Air release pipes shall be run to discharge at the nearest suitable
points.
Air bottles should be made from 50mm tube approximately 225mm long fitted with cap
and 4mm air cock. They shall be fitted to equal tees or 50mm connections whichever is
the greater. Where the air bottles are fixed outside of reach a 4mm extension tube shall
run from the cap to within 125mm of the floor, terminating with a 4mm air cock with
needle seat and loose key.
10.7
Strainers
Strainers shall be single type, with screwed BSP thread for bores up to and including 2
1/2” and shall be flanged for bores of 3 inches and above. The bodies of single strainers
of bores up to and including 2 1/2” shall be of gunmetal or bronze; for 3 inches bore and
above shall be of cast iron.
Straining cages shall be of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel and shall have 1.5mm
diameter perforations; the free area of the cage shall be at least five times the crosssectional area of the pipe. Cages shall be easily removable.
In addition to where shown on the drawings, strainers shall be fitted prior to all major
equipment including all pumps (pressure and circulating), air handling units, control
valves and flow meters.
10.8
Flexible Connections
0
These shall withstand pressures up to 16 Bar at 90 C. Bellows to be manufactured from
nylon cord reinforced neoprene rubber and steel flanges. Contractor shall seek approval
of such item from the Engineer prior to ordering and installation.
11.0
EXPANSION VESSELS
These are to be installed on pressurized water systems. Expansion vessel shall be divided into
two compartments by a special membrane or diaphragm of rubber composition which prevents
the water coming into contract with the air. The rubber bladder shall be replaceable. On one side
of the diaphragm the vessel is filled with air or nitrogen at the required pressure. The other
section of the vessel is connected directly to the water system. A correctly positioned air
separator will assist in de-aerating the water in the system.
All vessels are to be manufactured from stainless steel.
MTS Consulting Ltd
17
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.0
C43284
GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A gas suppression system for protection in the Archive floor at level -1 shall be installed.
The successful contractor is to take his own measurements and shall also take into account the
particular layout of the room before finalising his design. It is the contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that measurements are accurate.
The system and its components must all comply with the applicable standards to ensure safe and
effective operation.
12.1
System Operation
The system shall be capable of both automatic and manual operation. In both cases it
shall be possible to stop the release of the extinguishing medium during the delay period
by pressing a large red mushroom type switch marked “STOP”.
Two such switches shall be used, one within the protected space and another placed
next to the yellow gas-release call-point outside the door. Both shall be clearly labelled.
12.1.1 Automatic
The gas discharge panel shall, upon receipt of the first alarm, send a signal to
the main fire alarm panel, which will activate the normal fire alarm sounders. A
sounder outside the protected area shall also be activated directly by the panel.
Upon receipt of the second knock signal, the panel shall activate two
sirens/flashers, one inside the protected room and another just outside, and start
the delay period count. Once the delay period is over it will release the
extinguishing fluid.
12.1.2 Manual
When set to manual operation the gas discharge panel shall still send a signal to
the main panel and activate the first-knock sounder upon first activation but the
sequence will stop there.
Operation of the yellow release break-glass at any time, will instruct the panel to
go immediately to the second knock sequence as described under automatic
operation above.
All system components, system operation and general arrangements shall strictly
comply to relative British or European Standard and shall also meet fire
protection for electronic data processing installations as detailed in the latest
issue of BS 6266: 2002
Major components shall, moreover, shall have an approved BRE certification and
shall be listed in the current edition of the Red Book Volume 1, Part 7
MTS Consulting Ltd
18
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.2
C43284
Control Panel
The control panel shall have two detector input circuits. Both circuits need to sense the
alarm state before the extinguishing fluid is released. A time delay between evacuation
signals and the discharge of the fluid is to be incorporated. During the delay period two
local sirens, one of which shall be placed within the protected area, shall be activated.
Biased switches are to be provided both inside and outside the protected area, the
manual operation of either during the delay period will prevent the discharge of fluid.
A volt free contact in the panel shall be connected to the building’s fire alarm detection
system to give an alarm in case of fire in the protected room.
Wiring of the system is to be kept as short as possible and the panel shall be protected
against surges in power lines by its own, locally installed, surge protector Type A.
Although the surge protector can be installed within the panel enclosure, on board surge
protection only shall not be considered acceptable.
12.3
Detection
An aspiration system with sampling points in the three areas, (in the room, above soffit
and beneath the raised floor where applicable), as well as in the cabinets themselves, (by
means of capillary tubes from the main pipe above the soffit), shall be used for first knock
detection. Manufacturer’s specifications and engineering parameters shall be adhered to
at all times.
For the second knock detection, one optical and one ionisation detector shall be installed
in each space, (in the room, above soffit and beneath the raised floor).
12.4
Cylinder Valves
Each cylinder shall be equipped with a discharge valve capable of discharging liquid at
the required rate. The valve body shall withstand a pressure of not less than four times
the operating pressure and shall not leak upon being subjected to pressures of not less
than three times the operating pressure. Valves shall bear the manufacturer’s part
number.
Valve assemblies are to be certified by the LPCB
12.5
Discharge Nozzles
Discharge nozzles shall be manufactured in corrosion resistant material and be of
adequate strength to withstand expected working temperatures and pressures.
Permanent markings shall show the equivalent single orifice diameter and the
manufacturer’s part number. The contractor must ascertain that number and location of
nozzles shall be such that the design concentrations are established throughout the
protected area.
Discharge nozzles are to be certified by the LPCB.
MTS Consulting Ltd
19
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.6
C43284
Pipework
Galvanised threaded steel pipework and fittings shall be used and the grade employed
shall be able to withstand the expected pressures. All pipes and fittings shall conform to
the recommendations of BS 5306 section 10.3.3 to 10.3.5.
All fluid pipework shall be painted Red in accordance with the requirements of BS 381C;
and properly earthed.
It is important to ensure that all pipework is securely supported, making due allowance for
expansion and contraction. Care should be taken to ensure that the supporting structure
is strong enough to take the dynamic and static forces involved in such systems. Support
shall also be given near nozzles and shall be less than 100mm for pipes of 25mm or less
and less than 250mm for pipes larger than 25mm.
The contractor shall be responsible for correct location of hangers and alignment of
piping. Maximum span between hangers shall be in accordance with the table below. Any
piping not in proper alignment will have to be re-installed at no expense.
Pipe size
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
12.7
Maximum span (m)
1.0
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.4
3.5
3.7
4.3
Labels
Labels shall be supplied and fixed near each manual control and at the entrance to each
protected area. These labels shall strictly conform to figures 12 and 13 of BS 5306,
section 5.1.
MTS Consulting Ltd
20
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.8
C43284
Testing and Training
The contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer of the system, a comprehensive checklist to enable the engineer to witness that the tests are being carried out in a satisfactory
manner.
Tests shall include electrical connections, fluid tightness and correctly tightened nuts and
bolts of the system.
A room air-tightness integrity test shall be carried out by temporarily replacing the door
with a fan assembly as described in Appendix E of BS ISO 14520-1:2006. The gas hold
time shall be calculated and corrections made as necessary. A written report of this test
and resulting actions taken shall be presented to the engineer.
The installing contractor shall present operating and maintenance manuals during final
testing. Appropriate training shall be given to the client’s representatives until all are
perfectly conversant with the system’s controls and options during operation.
MTS Consulting Ltd
21
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION IV – FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
GENERAL
The design of the fire alarm detection system is intended to provide a category part 1 fire
protection throughout the entire levels as recommended in the BS:5839, latest editions.
With reference to ancillary equipment under fire alarm conditions, the proposed fire alarm
detection system shall override the proprietary controls to shut down the systems accordingly.
In areas where it is considered a high risk fire zone or contains critical equipment, an
extinguishing system shall be employed as a means of additional protection to protect equipment
or property from damage. This extinguishing system in subject shall be supplied completely with
its own proprietary operating panel by others. This shall communicate with the main fire alarm by
means of a standard industrial communication protocol RS232/485. A standard I/O interface has
also been included. The area shall still be covered with smoke detectors pertaining to the Fire
Alarm & Detection System as described in this section.
The positioning of the fire alarm detectors shall be co-ordinated accordingly with the A/C unit’s air
flow and lighting position without minimizing the efficiency of the fire detectors to operate
according to the manufacturer specifications in case of a fire situation.
The system shall have power back-up facilities which will last at least 24 hours normal
(unalarmed) operation and give a thirty minute alarm, in case of fire conditions.
All components of the system are to work in an ambient temperature range of zero to fifty
degrees Centigrade, with up to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing).
All components of the system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
The system shall be fully networked and integrated with the Main Fire Alarm panel located in the
security room in the main building at ground floor level. The existing panel is an Advanced system
based on the Mx-4000 protocol.
2.0
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
The four loop fire alarm panel (FAP) shall contain all hardware and software, including power
supply with power back-up facilities that will last at least 24 hours normal (unalarmed) operation and
give a thirty-minute alarm, in case of fire detection, as well as all interfacing required. The system is
to conform to BS:5839. It shall be addressable, complete with appropriate software in order to
detect real fires as quickly as possible while at the same time eliminating false alarms. The system
should be capable of reducing the sensitivity of a detector or group of detectors during specific time
periods.
The FAP shall be capable to analyse the condition of all input devices and automatically initiate
output states as dictated by the “cause and effect” schedule. The panel shall be programmed to
sound the evacuation signal upon first alarm. Zoning shall be achieved by programmed grouping of
addressable devices rather than by system wiring. It shall also print out a log of events, be they fire
alarms, fault alarms, supervisory alarms or manual intervention on the panel. The FAP shall be
easily accessible to firemen.
MTS Consulting Ltd
22
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The sound level of the devices shall conform to the sound level requirements specified in the BS
5839-8:2013.
The fire alarm control panel shall incorporate the following features:








Continuous supervision of all detector/sounder lines
Battery back-up and battery charger
'Charger on' lamp or indication
Test facility
Visual/audible system fault indication
Visual/Audible zone fault indication
Battery failure indication
'Silence Alarm' switch, key or button
'Volt free' contacts for operation of ancillary equipment.
Should an audible alarm be silenced any further alarm signals shall re-activate the sounders.
3.0
DETECTORS
All detectors shall:




Comply with B.S. 5446, Part 1 and B.S. 5445, Parts 5, 7 and 8 as appropriate.
Be interchangeable in a common plug-in base.
Have a local alarm state indicator.
Have possibility of remote alarm state indicator.
3.1
Optical Smoke Detectors
Optical smoke detectors shall be sensitive to visible smoke particles in the range of 0.5 to
10 micro metres. Consideration must be given in the design to minimise false alarms due
to ingress of dust or insects.
3.2
Heat Detectors
o
Fixed heat detector operating at 57 C.
4.0
MANUAL CALL POINT
Manual call points shall comply with BS 5839 Part 2.
The break glass call point switch shall be held in place by the edge of the glass which shall be
plastic coated to prevent fragmentation. Housed in a red thermo plastic case, the unit shall be
easily tested by appropriate probe key. The manual call point shall be furnished with a red LED to
indicate operation.
Manual call points shall be mounted 1.4m above finished floor.
MTS Consulting Ltd
23
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
5.0
C43284
INTEGRATION WITH OTHER SERVICES
5.1
Lifts
The fire alarm panel shall, on receipt of any alarm, send a signal to all lifts. On receipt of
such signal, the lifts shall move to pre-assigned levels and stop functioning.
5.2
Fire Fighting System
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from any fire fighting system, the signal shall raise a
local fire alarm as well as an alarm on the main fire alarm panel. Different fire fighting
systems shall obviously have a different address and thus raise a separate alarm.
5.3
Generator
The generator set should a fire valve on the generator operate, a mercury switch on this
unit shall give a signal to the fire alarm panel that should be regarded as a fire signal.
5.4
Motorised Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be activated by means of a fire signal from the Fire Alarm System
Panel. Closure of fire dampers will depend on the programming of the system whether
zones shall be applied or whether the system will shut down all dampers together.
5.5
Mechanical Fire Dampers
Mechanical fire dampers which are operated by heat rather than a fire alarm signal shall
have an I/O device to monitor their state and relay it to the fire alarm panels. Where
possible, fire dampers shall be grouped and wired onto a single I/O device.
5.6
HRU’s / Air conditioning systems
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from the protected areas, the units shall automatically
be switched off. Units will not switch on automatically and must be manually reset by the
user.
5.7
Access Control Doors
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal, doors controlled by the access control system and
which are on the predetermined escape route shall be released in order to facilitate
evacuation.
5.8
Gas Suppression Clear Agent system Interface
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from the protected areas, the signal shall raise a local
fire alarm as well as in the main fire alarm panel.
MTS Consulting Ltd
24
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
6.0
C43284
AUDIO / VISUAL DEVICES
6.1
Detector base sounders
These sounders are to have a minimum sound level of 83dBA @ 1m.It shall be
compatible with the common base used for the detection devices and in turn be able to
plug a detector onto this sounder as on integral unit.
6.2
Strobe Light
Suitable for 24 volt D.C. operation. The high output strobe shall enhance the attention
getting function of the sounders in specific areas.
7.0
SHORT CIRCUIT ISOLATORS
A minimum number of three short circuit isolators are to be incorporated in the circuit per floor so
that any short circuit fault in cable or detector will not affect the remainder of the loop. Short circuit
isolators should be located where the wiring passes from one covered level to another. Should
detectors be fitted with an onboard isolator this item becomes superfluous and shall not be
required.
8.0
WIRING
Twin screened cable, 1.5mm section minimum, complying with CWZ category, PH30
classification of EN50200 and certified to maintain circuit integrity when simultaneously exposed
o
to 830 C and mechanical shock for 15 minutes followed by simultaneous exposure to water spray
and mechanical shock for a further 15 minutes.
Chased downdrops to devices at low level, wiring going around beams or areas where the wiring
needs additional protection shall be laid in 20mm self extinguishing PVC conduit. Approved
metallic saddles shall be used for horizontal runs of this conduit in order that the cable remains in
place even in case of fire.
9.0
LABELLING
All devices, whether detectors, call points sounders or interface units shall be labelled with loop
and device number.
10.0
VOIDS
Voids, should there be any, be it above the false ceiling or below the raised floor, especially
where electrical cables are present, should be protected by appropriate detectors. Special care
shall be taken with the positioning of detectors to ensure that the sensing element is positioned in
the top 10% of the void. Heat detectors should be placed in voids that may not be easily
reachable for maintenance or cleaning.
MTS Consulting Ltd
25
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
11.0
C43284
INTEGRATION WITH THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Prospective tenderers are to have a site visit arranged in order to gather the required information
on the existing system and its requirements. The contract is to include FULL networking with the
existing system in order that the security from the main control room would have all the
information required of the fire alarm panel status. This is not limited to the fire condition, but also
on the status of the individual accessories, detectors and interfaces. Contractors are also to keep
in mind that this existing system might be changed or upgraded in the near future.
During installation, disruption to the existing Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be kept to a
minimum and only in conformity to the Bank’s requirement. The contractor is to allow for such
disruptions to take place outside normal working hours.
MTS Consulting Ltd
26
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION V – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE
The scope of the access control system is to prevent unauthorized entries to restricted areas. The
system software shall provide a hierarchal architectural system where access to restricted areas
are given accordingly by the Security manager through the system software
The performance and functions of the access control system shall be monitored and controlled
via proprietary software. The level of access rights given to end users shall be determined by the
client.
The Access Control system is to be connected with the Fire Alarm System in order that a fire
signal will release selected doors in the fire escape route or as required by the security section.
2.0
ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES
The access control system shall be equipped by two types of devices, namely proximity card and
or keypad or both.
However, the system should be capable to cater for other high tech devices without the need to
replace the structural cables, system software etc, if required in the future.
The functions for each access device are described in detail below:
2.1
Proximity Access Control
Users who are given unrestricted rights of access to certain areas are provided with
proximity card, to prevent others from accessing unauthorised areas. These systems
require the users to enter the proximity card into the card readers for entry/exit access.
Proximity cards should be programmable in order that particular employees or visitors
may have full access to particular areas but be restricted from entering others areas.
2.2
Keypad Control
The keypad control is to be equipped with a keypad with incorporated proximity card
reader. This control unit is to be vandal and weather proof. Each user will have his/her
individual code in order that personnel using this keypad are recorded in terms of identity,
time and date of entry or exit.
2.3
Door Switch Alarm
The magnetic contact door switch is the most common type of switch, which is used with
intruder alarm systems to monitor the building entrances.
MTS Consulting Ltd
27
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The magnetic door contact shall trigger the alarm in the event that that the secured door
is accessed at unauthorised time. For safety and security reasons, it is not permitted to
use lock conditions on all fire exit routes, and the access control shall be configured to
aid the fire fighting team by recording the number of personnel, which left the building
and those who are still occupying the building during evacuation circumstances.
2.4
Door Release switch
The door locks are to be provided by others. It is preferable that the lock itself is
connected to the system and the door is released on opening the lock from the secure
side without the use of door release buttons. The contractor is however to allow for extra
door release buttons as indicated in the relative Bills of Quantities at a maximum of 3m
away from each controlled door.
3.0
WIRING
All wiring shall be laid in 20 or 25mm PVC conduit as required. The contractor shall be
responsible for the installation of the whole system and no part of the installation shall be
procured by others.
4.0
LITERATURE AND TRAINING
Manufacturer's technical literature for all the components of the system shall be provided.
Adequate training in the operation of the system shall be given to the client's representative/s
before handing over the system.
MTS Consulting Ltd
28
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level -3
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level -2
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level +0
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level +1
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level +2
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level +3
Intruder Alarm System Layout – Level +4
43284-ELV-IA-01
43284-ELV-IA-02
43284-ELV-IA-03
43284-ELV-IA-04
43284-ELV-IA-05
43284-ELV-IA-06
43284-ELV-IA-07
*Note: An unlocked electronic version of the above drawings can be made available to the successful
Tenderer who is awarded the contract as detailed in the bill of quantities. These drawings would be
issued for the sole purpose of the preparation of ‘Installation’ and ‘As-fitted’ drawings of this particular
project and they are not to be transmitted or copied in any form to third parties without the written
permission of Mediterranean Technical Services Limited.
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
23
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
The Tenderer shall provide a list of all materials and equipment, the name of the manufacturer and
the type or model number (where applicable) of all the types he is proposing to use on the
installation.
Once accepted and the Contract signed, the Contractor shall be bound to supply and install the
material detailed in the list forming part of the Tender, subject to the written approval of the
Engineer, authorising alternative material/equipment.
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
1.
PIR sensor
2.
Magnetic door contact
3.
Keypad with display panel
4.
External sounder / flasher
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
22
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Ltd
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Ltd
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Ltd
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Ltd
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
MTS Consulting Ltd
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Ltd
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
MTS Consulting Ltd
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Ltd
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Ltd
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Ltd
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Ltd
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Ltd
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
C43284
SECTION III – INTRUDER ALARM SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
GENERAL
The intruder alarm system is to conform to the provisions of BS4737 part 1, 2 and 3 as
appropriate.
The components of the system shall be connected to a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) to be
located at the reception area at ground floor level. This RTU shall be connected to the main
intruder alarm system. Eventual contractors are to request specific information for connection with
THEIR system to confirm compatibility, should it not be the same as the one installed.
All components of the system are to work in an ambient temperature range of zero to fifty
degrees Centigrade, with up to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing).
The zones and the operation of the intruder alarm system shall be agreed with the contractor and
Bank during installation.
The system shall be fully integrated with the existing Intruder Alarm panel located in the security
room in the main building at ground floor level. The existing panel is a Bentel KYO100.
2.0
MAGNETIC CONTACTS
Magnetic contacts shall be used on doors and windows as indicated on the drawings. The type of
detector used shall be adequate for the type of door / window frame. Flush / hidden detectors are
preferred to surface type detectors.
The latter shall be allowed only when their use is unavoidable. Wiring to the contacts shall be
through the door / window frame. No visible wiring shall be allowed.
3.0
PASSIVE INFRA RED DETECTOR
o
The wall mounting type infrared movement detectors shall have an operating radius of 160 and
an adjustable detection range of 12 metres and supplied complete with an adjustable bracket.
The PIR shall be adequate for IP54 degree of ingress protection.
The recessed, soffit mounting type, infra-red movement detectors shall have an operating
o
surveyed radius of 6m at 360 detection angle.
4.0
ENTRY KEYPADS
The building can be closed independently after office hours and therefore shall require a number
of entry keypad to activate and deactivate the alarm on entry and exit. These are located at the
main entrance at ground floor level and the two basement entry points from the car park levels.
Depending on the security level, it shall be possible to deactivate part of the system as
preselected and programmed by the client. This shall mainly discriminate between detection in
the common circulation areas and detection within the offices.
MTS Consulting Ltd
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Intruder Alarm Systems
5.0
C43284
ELECTRONIC SOUNDER / STROBE
The electronic sounder shall be suitable for 12 volt D.C. operation. This electronic sounder shall
have a distinctive siren sound with a minimum output of 100 dBA at 1 metre. The unit shall have
internal batteries and be completely self activating. The sounder shall have a programmable built
in time out to cut off the sound after the pre-set period.
The Xenon strobe light shall have a minimum output of 1 Watt.
The housing shall be polycarbonate or metal, be designed to prevent tampering or foaming and
be weather-proof to IP65.
5.0
WIRING
All wiring from the main RTU to sounders, detectors and ancillary services shall be laid in 20 or
25mm PVC conduit as required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the whole system and no part of the
installation shall be procured by others.
6.0
LITERATURE AND TRAINING
Manufacturer's technical literature for all the components of the system shall be provided.
Adequate training in the operation of the system shall be given to the client's representative/s
before handing over the system.
MTS Consulting Ltd
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
LIST OF DRAWINGS
ELECTRICAL
Electrical Power System Layout – Level -3
Electrical Power System Layout – Level -2
Electrical Power System Layout – Level -1
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +0
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +1
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +2
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +3
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +4
Electrical Power System Layout – Level +5
43284-ELEC-P-01
43284-ELEC-P-02
43284-ELEC-P-03
43284-ELEC-P-04
43284-ELEC-P-05
43284-ELEC-P-06
43284-ELEC-P-07
43284-ELEC-P-08
43284-ELEC-P-09
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level -3
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level -2
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level -1
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +0
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +1
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +2
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +3
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +4
Electrical Lighting System Layout – Level +5
43284-ELEC-L-01
43284-ELEC-L-02
43284-ELEC-L-03
43284-ELEC-L-04
43284-ELEC-L-05
43284-ELEC-L-06
43284-ELEC-L-07
43284-ELEC-L-08
43284-ELEC-L-09
Electrical Schematic Layout
43284-ELEC-S-01
Facade Lighting Part 1 (Elevation/Plans)
Facade Lighting Part 2 (Elevation/Plan)
Facade Lighting Part 3 (Elevation)
Facade Lighting Part 3 (Plans)
43284-ELEC-EX-01
43284-ELEC-EX-02
43284-ELEC-EX-03
43284-ELEC-EX-04
Light Fittings’ Schedule
43284-ELEC-LG-01
HVAC
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +0
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +1
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +2
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +3
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +4
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level +5
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level -1
Air-conditioning System Layout – Level -2
43284-HVAC-P-01
43284-HVAC-P-02
43284-HVAC-P-03
43284-HVAC-P-04
43284-HVAC-P-05
43284-HVAC-P-06
43284-HVAC-P-07
43284-HVAC-P-08
Ventilation System Layout – Level -3
Ventilation System Layout – Level -2
Ventilation System Layout – Level -1
Ventilation System Layout – Level +0
Ventilation System Layout – Level +1
Ventilation System Layout – Level +2
Ventilation System Layout – Level +3
Ventilation System Layout – Level +4
Ventilation System Layout – Level +5
43284-HVAC-D-01
43284-HVAC-D-02
43284-HVAC-D-03
43284-HVAC-D-04
43284-HVAC-D-05
43284-HVAC-D-06
43284-HVAC-D-07
43284-HVAC-D-08
43284-HVAC-D-09
Ventilation System Layout
43284-HVAC-S-01
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
242
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
MECHANICAL
Plumbing System Layout – Level -3
Plumbing System Layout – Level -2
Plumbing System Layout – Level -1
Plumbing System Layout – Level +0
Plumbing System Layout – Level +1
Plumbing System Layout – Level +2
Plumbing System Layout – Level +3
Plumbing System Layout – Level +4
43284-MECH-P-01
43284-MECH-P-02
43284-MECH-P-03
43284-MECH-P-04
43284-MECH-P-05
43284-MECH-P-06
43284-MECH-P-07
43284-MECH-P-08
Drainage System Layout – Level +0
Drainage System Layout – Level +1
Drainage System Layout – Level +2
Drainage System Layout – Level +3
Drainage System Layout – Level +4
43284-MECH-D-01
43284-MECH-D-02
43284 MECH-D-03
43284-MECH-D-04
43284-MECH-D-05
Gas Suppression System Layout – Level -1
Plumbing Schematic Layout
Pump Room System Layout – Level -3
43284-MECH-GS-01
43284-MECH-S-01
43284-DET-01
ELV
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level -3
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level -2
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level -1
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level +0
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level +1
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level +2
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level +3
Extra Low Voltage System Layout – Level +4
43284-ELV-D-01
43284-ELV-D-02
43284 ELV-D-03
43284 ELV-D-04
43284-ELV-D-05
43284-ELV-D-06
43284-ELV-D-07
43284-ELV-D-08
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Lightning Protection System Layout – Level -3
Lightning Protection System Layout – Level +3
Lightning Protection System Layout – Level +4
Lightning Protection System Layout – Level +5
43284-LP-01
43284-LP-02
43284-LP-03
43284-LP-04
BUILDER’S WORK
Builder’s Work Layout – Level -3
Builder’s Work Layout – Level -2
Builder’s Work Layout – Level -1
Builder’s Work Layout – Level +0
Builder’s Work Layout – Level +1
Builder’s Work Layout – Level +2
Builder’s Work Layout – Level +3
Builder’s Work Layout – Level +4
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
43284-BW-01
43284-BW-02
43284-BW-03
43284-BW-04
43284-BW-05
43284-BW-06
43284-BW-07
43284-BW-08
243
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
REFLECTED CEILING
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level -3
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level -2
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level -1
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level +0
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level +1
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level +2
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level +3
Reflected Ceiling Layout – Level +4
43284-RC-01
43284-RC-02
43284-RC-03
43284-RC-04
43284-RC-05
43284-RC-06
43284-RC-07
43284-RC-08
Note: An unlocked electronic version of the above drawings can be made available to the successful
Tenderer who is awarded the contract as detailed in the bill of quantities. These drawings would be
issued for the sole purpose of the preparation of ‘Installation’ and ‘As-fitted’ drawings of this particular
project and they are not to be transmitted or copied in any form to third parties without the written
permission of Mediterranean Technical Services Limited.
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
244
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
VENTILATION FAN SCHEDULE
Revision:
Reference
0
Issue Date:
11/09/2015
Air flow
ESP
Power
Supply
V/Ph/Hz
Type
Pa
Motor
Power
kW
Operation
Method
m3/hr
Motor
Speed
rpm
Installed
Level /
Location
Serving / Scope / Use
EF-T
0, 1, 2, 3
Toilet Area
450
100
2400
0.1
230/1/50
Variable speed
In-line centrifugal fan
EF-A
5
Archives
5,950
375
2840
2.2
400/3/50
Variable speed
Long cased axial fan
EF-C
5
Carpark
24,300
375
1430
5.5
400/3/50
Variable speed
Long cased axial fan
Additional Comments
ESP and motor ratings are indicative and valid for tender purposes only. These are to be confirmed by Contractor and submitted for approval
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev. 03
183
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
ROOF TOP UNITS SCHEDULE
Revision:
0
Issue Date:
RTU
Reference
Installed Level /
Location
Serving / Scope / Use
RTU
Level 4
Ventilation - All Floors
Flow
m3/hr
10,250
Supply Fan Data
ESP
Pa
350
Flow
m3/hr
7,970
11/09/2015
Return Fan Data
ESP
Pa
350
Total Cooling
Capacity
kW
Total Heating
Capacity
kW
Power
Supply
V/Ph/Hz
Maximum
Current
A
Noise
Breakout
dBA
60.0
59.8
400/3/50
46
60 at 3m
E.S.P. Values given above do not include any pressure drop across the RTU and Attenuators
All ESP's and motor ratings are indicative and are for tender purposes only and are to be confirmed by contractor upon completion of public area design and working drawings.
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev. 03
184
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
PUMPS SCHEDULE
Revision:
0
Pump
Reference
Installed Level /
Location
Description
Flow Head Motor
l/s
m
kW
Power
Supply
V/Ph/Hz
Operation
Method
Type
Additional Comments
Sump pump
Pumproom below level -3
Submersible pump
0.5
40
1.1
230/1/50
Duty
Fixed speed
N/A
Transfer pump Pumproom below level -3
Flooded suction pump set
15.0
40
7.5+7.5
400/3/50
Duty / Assist
Fixed speed
N/A
SCW
Pumproom below level -3
Flooded suction booster set
0.8
60
1.5+1.5
230/1/50
Duty / Standby Variable speed N/A
DCW
Pumproom at level -3
Flooded suction booster set
1.2
60
1.5+1.5
230/1/50
Duty / Standby Variable speed Suitable for potable application
Hose reel
Pumproom below level -3
Flooded suction booster set with 2 electric main pumps
2.5
60
5.5+5.5
400/3/50
Duty / Standby Fixed speed
11/09/2015
N/A
Pump heads and motor rating are indicative and for tender purposes only. These are to be confirmed by the contractor and submitted for approval
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev. 03
185
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SPLIT UNIT SCHEDULE
Revision:
0
Outdoor Unit
Reference
Indoor Unit
Reference
S-01
S-11
S-21
S-31
S-41
S-42
S-43
S-M2
IU-01
IU-01
IU-01
IU-01
IU-01
IU-09
IU-09
IU-11
Type
Wall mounted
Wall mounted
Wall mounted
Wall mounted
Wall mounted
Slim concealed ceiling
Slim concealed ceiling
Wall mounted
Date:
11/09/2015
Cooling
Capacity
kW
Heating
Capacity
kW
Noise
Breakout
dBA
Power
Input
kW
Maximum
Air Flow
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
7.1
7.1
5.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
8.0
8.0
6.3
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
42
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.18
0.18
0.04
450
450
450
450
450
990
990
900
3
m /hr
Supply Grille
Type
Size
mm
Return Grille
Type
Size
mm
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
As shown on drawings
As shown on drawings
N/A
Cooling and heating capacities based on indoor units operating at high speed
All capacities are based on nominal values
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
186
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
VRF UNIT SCHEDULE
Revision:
0
Date:
11/09/2015
Outdoor Unit
Reference
System
Type
Total Cooling
Capacity
kW
Motor
Power
hp
Power
Supply
V/Ph/Hz
Power
Input
kW
Indoor unit
Reference
Qty
Type
Cooling Noise
Capacity Breakout
kW
dBA
Maximum
Air Flow
m3/hr
Maximum
Power Input
kW
Supply Grille
Type Size
mm
Return Grille
Type Size
mm
VRF-01
3-pipe
28.0
10
400/3/50
7.7
IU-02
IU-03
8
2
4-way mini cassette
4-way mini cassette
2.2
3.6
30
32
540
570
0.073
0.076
N/A
N/A
VRF-02
2-pipe
33.5
12
400/3/50
9.4
IU-09
IU-10
3
2
Slim concealed ceiling 7.1
Concealed floor standing7.1
36
40
990
960
0.181
0.110
As shown in drawings
As shown in drawings
VRF-11
2-pipe
28.0
10
400/3/50
7.7
IU-03
IU-04
1
5
4-way mini cassette
4-way mini cassette
3.6
5.6
32
41
570
840
0.076
0.115
N/A
N/A
VRF-21
2-pipe
33.5
12
400/3/50
9.4
IU-03
IU-04
6
2
4-way mini cassette
4-way mini cassette
3.6
5.6
32
41
570
840
0.076
0.115
N/A
N/A
VRF-22
2-pipe
28.0
10
400/3/50
7.7
IU-04
6
4-way mini cassette
5.6
41
840
0.115
N/A
VRF-31
2-pipe
28.0
10
400/3/50
7.7
IU-06
IU-07
3
2
1-way ceiling cassette
1-way ceiling cassette
4.5
7.1
40
42
780
1080
0.076
0.105
N/A
N/A
VRF-32
2-pipe
28.0
10
400/3/50
7.7
IU-06
IU-07
IU-08
3
1
3
1-way ceiling cassette
1-way ceiling cassette
1-way ceiling cassette
4.5
7.1
2.8
40
42
38
780
1080
660
0.076
0.105
0.066
N/A
N/A
N/A
FCUs shall be selected to satisfy the above conditions with fans operated at high speed.
The noise levels for the fan coil shall satisfy statutory requirements for the occupied spaces and with their fans operating at high speed unless otherwise specified in the technical specifications
All capacities are based on nominal values
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
187
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-AC
Mains Switch:200A TPN Isolator
1
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 01
2
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 02
3
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 11
4
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 21
5
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 22
6
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 31
7
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
VRF Unit 32
8
L1
L2 32
L3
T
Spare
9
L1
L2 32
L3
T
Spare
L1
10 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
11 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
12 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
4 core x 6.0mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU +
1 core x 6.0mm2 PVC
E=
F=
G=
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
C43284
Location:- Level 4
Way - 12 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
188
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EPR
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level -3
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
2
L1 16
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
E
D
Power supply to Sump Pump
Power supply to SCW Booster set at Level -4
Spare
3
L1
L2 40
L3
T
G
Power Suppy to Water transfer Pump set
4
L1
L2 32
L3
T
F
Power supply to Hose Reel Booster set at Level -4
5
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
6
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
1
D
Spare
Spare
Power supply to DCW booster set at Level -3
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
Job No.:
C/43284
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
Date:
30/09/2015
2
3 x 4.0mm PVC
Revision No.:
0
3C x 4.0mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU
3C x 2.5mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU
4C x 4.0mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU + 1C x 4.0mm2 PVC
4C x 6.0mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU + 1C x 6.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
189
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EM3
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level -3
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-40A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
Permanent lighting - Car Park
General lighting - Car Park
General lighting - Rooms at Level -3 and -4
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets at Level 3
3
Power supply to electric/access doors/Traffic Barrier
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
6
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
General Power - Socket outlets-Tank Room (Level-3) / Pump Room (Level -4)
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
190
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EM2
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level -2
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-40A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
Permanent lighting - Car Park
General lighting - Car Park
General lighting - Rooms at Level -2
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 32
L2 20
L3 32
S
S
S
C
B
C
General Power - Socket outlets at Level 3
Airconditioning Unit - Electrical switchroom
Power supply to electric/access doors/Traffic Barrier
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
General lighting - Main Stairs
Emergency Non-maintained lighting - Main Stairs
Emergency Directional Exit lighting - Main Stairs
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
A
A
A
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
191
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EM1
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
Location:- Level -1
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-40A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting - Switches S1 and S2
General lighting - Switches S3 and S4
General lighting - Switches S5 and S6
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
2
General lighting - Stores
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets in stores
Power supply to electric/access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
General Power - Motorized Fire Dampers
General Power - Gas Suppression System
Spare
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
192
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EZ0
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level 0
Way - 16 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-100A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting
General lighting
General lighting
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting
General lighting
General lighting
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Water Heater / Extractor fan on timer for General Toilets
General Power - Kitchenette
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
8
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1 20
L2 20
L3 32
S
S
S
B
C
Spare
Power supply to AC in Comms Room
Power supply to Roller door / electric /access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
10 L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
C
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-01
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-01
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-02
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1
11 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
12 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
13 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
14 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
`
L1
15 L2 32
L3
T
D
Lighting Switching Panel LSP-ERC (Reception)
L1
16 L2 32
L3
T
D
Lighting Switching Panel LSP-EXF (External Facade)
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
5 core x 6.0mm2 PVC/PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
193
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EP1
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
A
A
A
C43284
Location:- Level +1
Way - 12 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-100A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
General lighting
General lighting
General lighting
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Water Heater / Extractor fan on timer for General Toilets
General Power - Kitchenette
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
C
7
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
General Power - Socket outlets Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
8
L1 20
L2 20
L3 32
S
S
S
C
B
C
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-11
Power supply to AC in Comms Room
Power supply to electric/access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1 20
L2 20
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
10 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1
11 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
12 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
194
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EP2
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
Location:- Level +2
Way - 16 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-100A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Water Heater / Extractor fan on timer for General Toilets
General Power - Kitchenette
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
8
General Power - Socket outlets Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
10 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
11 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
12 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
General Power - Kitchenette
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
13 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
Spare
Spare
Power supply to electric/access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
14 L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
B
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-21
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-22
Power supply to AC in Comms Room
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 32
15 L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 16
16 L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
195
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EP3
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level +3
Way - 16 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-100A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
Spare
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Water Heater / Extractor fan on timer for General Toilets
General Power - Kitchenette
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
8
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets
General Power - Socket outlets - External
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
Spare
Spare
Power supply to electric/access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
10 L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
B
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-31
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-32
Power supply to AC in Comms Room
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
11 L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 16
12 L2 16
L3 16
L1
13 L2
L3
L1
14 L2
L3
L1
15 L2
L3
L1
16 L2
L3
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
196
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EP4
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level +4
Way - 12 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-63A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting General lighting General lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 16
L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
A
A
A
General lighting - - External at Level 5
Emergency Non-maintained lighting
Emergency Directional Exit lighting -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Kitchenette
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets General Power - Socket outlets Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
C
C
General Power - Socket outlets - External
General Power - Socket outlets - External
General Power - Socket outlets - External
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
C
7
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
General Power - Socket outlets - External at Level 5
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
8
L1 32
L2 32
L3 32
S
S
S
C
Spare
Spare
Power supply to electric/access doors
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
C
C
C
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-42
Power supply to indoor units - VRF-43
Power supply to AC in Comms Room
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 16
10 L2 16
L3 16
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1
11 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
12 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
197
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-UZ0
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level 0
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
1
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets
General UPS Power - UPS Socket outlets Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
General UPS Power - Data racks
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
B
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
198
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-UP1
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level +1
Way 8 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
1
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
General UPS Power - Data racks
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
B
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
199
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-UP2
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level +2
Way - 12 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
1
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
5
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
B
8
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
General UPS Power - Socket outlets Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
9
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
L1 20
10 L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
General UPS Power - Data racks
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
B
L1
11 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
12 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
200
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-UP3
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
C43284
Location:- Level +3
Way - 10 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
1
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
2
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
3
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
4
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
B
B
B
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
B
5
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
General UPS Power - Socket outlets Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
6
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
7
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
General UPS Power - Data racks
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
B
8
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
9
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
10 L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
201
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-UP4
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
1
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
S
S
S
2
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
3
L1 20
L2 20
L3 20
4
L1
L2
L3
5
L1
L2
L3
6
L1
L2
L3
7
L1
L2
L3
8
L1
L2
L3
9
L1
L2
L3
B
B
B
C43284
Location:- Level +4
Way 4 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-
General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets General UPS Power - Socket outlets -
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
S
S
S
Spare
Spare
General UPS Power - Data racks
RCBO
RCBO
RCBO
B
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
202
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Site:- New BOV Centre
Distribution Board :DB-EVN
Mains Switch:100A TPN Isolator
Location:- Level +4
Way 6 WAY TP & N MCBs
RCDs:-100A TPN RCD Type S at 300mA trip current
1
L1
L2 63
L3
T
E
RTU
2
L1
L2 32
L3
T
D
Fan Control Panel FCP
3
L1
L2 32
L3
T
4
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
5
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
6
L1
L2
L3
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
Blank Plate
7
L1
L2
L3
8
L1
L2
L3
9
L1
L2
L3
Spare
L1
10 L2
L3
L1
11 L2
L3
L1
12 L2
L3
S=
T=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
Single Pole MCB
Triple Pole MCB
2
3 x 1.5mm PVC
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
2
2
4C x 4.0mm XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU + 1C x 4.0mm PVC
2
4C x 10.0mm XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU + 1C x 10.0mm2 PVC
MTS CONSULTING LTD
Job No.:
Date:
Revision No.:
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
C/43284
30/09/2015
0
203
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
LIGHTING SWITCHING PANEL LSP-ERC (Reception Desk)
Main Incomer:32A TPN ISOLATOR
Contactor Type: 16A DP 48 Volt coil/circuit
Control Type: PLC Unit timer channel per switch
Timer
Channel
Switch
Override
Reference Switch
Circuit
Reference
Circuit
Protection
Cable
Contactor
48V Coil
1
2
3
4
5
SWR1
SWR2
SWR3
SWR4
SWR5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ERC/L1/1
ERC/L1/1
ERC/L1/1
ERC/L1/1
ERC/L1/1
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
16A DP
16A DP
16A DP
6
7
8
SWR6
SWR7
SWR8
Yes
Yes
Yes
ERC/L2/1
ERC/L2/1
ERC/L2/1
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
16A DP
9
10
11
SWR9
SWR10
SWR11
Yes
Yes
Yes
ERC/L3/1
ERC/L3/1
ERC/L3/1
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
16A DP
12
13
SWR12
SWR13
Yes
Yes
ERC/L1/2
ERC/L1/2
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
14
15
SWR14
SWR15
Yes
Yes
ERC/L2/2
ERC/L2/2
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
16
17
SWR16
SWR17
Yes
Yes
ERC/L3/2
ERC/L3/2
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
18
19
SWR18
SWR19
Yes
Yes
ERC/L1/3
ERC/L1/3
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
20
Spare
Yes
ERC/L2/3
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
21
Spare
Yes
ERC/L3/3
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
SR = Single Pole RCBO: Rated at 30mA earth fault trip leakage current
S=
Single Pole MCB
T=
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
A=
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
B=
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
C=
D=
E=
MTS CONSULTING LTD
F=
G=
H=
Job No.:
C/43284
Date:
30/09/2015
Revision No.:
0
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
204
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
LIGHTING SWITCHING PANEL LSP-EXF (External Facade)
Main Incomer:32A TPN ISOLATOR
Contactor Type: 16A DP 48 Volt coil/circuit
Incoming Control Type: Lux Sensor on 32A contactor
Outgoing Control Type: PLC Unit timer channel per switch
Timer
Channel
Switch
Override
Reference Switch
Circuit
Reference
Circuit
Protection
Cable
Contactor
48V Coil
1
SWXF1
Yes
EXF/L1/1
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
2
3
SWXF2
SWXF3
Yes
Yes
EXF/L2/1
EXF/L2/1
16A SP RCBO
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
16A DP
4
SWXF4
Yes
EXF/L3/1
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
5
SWXF5
Yes
EXF/L1/2
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
6
SWXF6
Yes
EXF/L2/2
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
7
SWXF7
Yes
EXF/L3/2
16A SP RCBO
3x1.5 mm sq. PVC
16A DP
8
Spare
Yes
EXF/L1/3
16A SP RCBO
16A DP
9
Spare
Yes
EXF/L2/3
16A SP RCBO
16A DP
10
Spare
Yes
EXF/L3/3
16A SP RCBO
16A DP
SR = Single Pole RCBO: Rated at 30mA earth fault trip leakage current
S=
Single Pole MCB
T=
Triple Pole MCB
3 x 1.5mm2 PVC
A=
3 x 2.5mm2 PVC
B=
3 x 4.0mm2 PVC
C=
D=
E=
MTS CONSULTING LTD
F=
G=
H=
Job No.:
C/43284
Date:
30/09/2015
Revision No.:
0
MTS Consulting Limited
F08/Rev.03
205
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
INTERNAL LIGHT FIXTURES (CEILING)
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
to fit within a 60x60cm soffit ceiling tile
TRIM FINISH:
powder coated white
DIFFUSER:
Technopolymer diffuser
L1
RECESSED CEILING LUMINAIRE,
SQUARE SHAPE
(for office spaces)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
40W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
Ø 236mm
TRIM FINISH:
white outer trim with polished aluminium inner trim
DIFFUSER:
flush-mounted sandblasted glass
L2
COMPACT FLUORESCENT
DOWNLIGHTER
(for office spaces)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
white - 4000K
and a central satin finish, flush mounted glass.
POWER/WATTAGE:
15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
206
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
Ø135mm
TRIM FINISH:
white outer trim with polished aluminium inner trim
DIFFUSER:
flush-mounted sandblasted glass
LAMP:
LED
L3
LED INTEGRATED DOWNLIGHTER
(for office spaces, kitchenettes)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
Ø85mm
TRIM FINISH:
satin finish black
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
L4
LED INTEGRATED DOWNLIGHTER
(for the meeting rooms)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
anti-glare tube, adjustable 0°-20°
MTS Consulting Limited
207
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
Ø81mm
TRIM FINISH:
satin finish black
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
L5
LED INTEGRATED DOWNLIGHTER
(for wc facilities)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
anti-glare tube, adjustable 0°-20°
SIZE:
Ø225mm, height not more than 100mm & not less than 50mm
TRIM FINISH:
white outer tube & high-gloss optic inner tube
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
L6
LOW HEIGHT SURFACE MOUNTED
LED
CEILING DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE
(for corridors leading to wc facilities) COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
12W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
adjustable ±40° around two axis forming the horizontal plane
MTS Consulting Limited
208
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
107mm by 107mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless, structure finish in white
DIFFUSER:
N/A
LAMP:
LED
A1
RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHTER
(use as architectural lighting in office COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
areas)
POWER/WATTAGE:
8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP23
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
205mm by 107mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless, structure finish in white
DIFFUSER:
N/A
LAMP:
LED
A2
RECESSED LED TWIN DOWNLIGHTER
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(used as architectural lighting in
warm white - 3000K
office areas)
POWER/WATTAGE:
2x8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP23
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
209
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
107mm by 107mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless, structure finish in black
DIFFUSER:
N/A
LAMP:
LED
A3
RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHTER
(use as architectural lighting in lift
lobby areas)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
8W approx.
IP RATING:
IP23
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
670mm by 670mm
TRIM FINISH:
white
DIFFUSER:
opal diffuser in synthetic material
LAMP:
LED
CM1
CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRE
(for board room at level +4)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
40W approx.
IP RATING:
IP50
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
210
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
1800mm by 58mm
TRIM FINISH:
powder coated white
DIFFUSER:
frosted polycarbonate diffuser with anti-glare surface
P1
SUSPENDED ALUMINIUM PROFILE
LIGHT
(for manager's office space)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
30W approx.
IP RATING:
IP44
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
10m at each lift lobby at each level / 2.5m at reception
TRIM FINISH:
assembled on white flexible circuit with transparent silicone
sheath outer protection with end caps
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LEDs
S1
Linear ledstrip lighting
(above soffit)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
monochromatic white LEDs - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65 for the full undivided length strip, IP20 for connectors
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
To include all necessary LED drivers.
MTS Consulting Limited
211
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
length of 1200mm
TRIM FINISH:
white
DIFFUSER:
not necessary
L7
SUSPENDED OR CEILING MOUNTED
BACK OF HOUSE LIGHT
(for store at level +4)
LAMP:
fuorescent
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
1x35W approx.
IP RATING:
IP40
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
as per dimensions in the image
TRIM FINISH:
trimless (white)
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
CP1
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING LEDs
AND WALL
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridors lev 0,1 and 2)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
212
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
as per dimensions in the image
TRIM FINISH:
trimless
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
CP2
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING LEDs
AND WALL
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridor lev 0)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
900mm by 58mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
LEDs
CP3
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridor lev 0)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
213
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
as per dimensions in the image
TRIM FINISH:
trimless
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
CP4
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING LEDs
AND WALL
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridors lev 0,1 and 2)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
2100mm by 58mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
LEDs
CP5
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridors lev 0,1 and 2)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
214
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
2100mm by 58mm
TRIM FINISH:
trimless
DIFFUSER:
030 frost polycarbonate diffuser
LAMP:
LEDs
CP6
RECESSED LINEAR PROFILE - CEILING
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for corridors lev 0,1 and 2)
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20 general, IP43 optics
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
as indicated in illustrations OAE
TRIM FINISH:
aluminium alloy coated with grey acrylic paint
DIFFUSER:
Flood optic
LAMP:
T1
VERTICALLY MOUNTED TRACK
Warm white monochrome LED
LIGHTS TO LIGHT UP IN 3 DIRECTIONS
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for atrium space - on wall arm)
3100K
POWER/WATTAGE:
3 x 15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
215
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
as indicated in illustrations OAE
TRIM FINISH:
aluminium alloy coated with grey acrylic paint
DIFFUSER:
Flood optic
LAMP:
T2
VERTICALLY MOUNTED TRACK
Warm white monochrome LED
LIGHTS TO LIGHT UP IN 2 DIRECTIONS
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(for atrium space - on wall arm)
3100K
POWER/WATTAGE:
2 x 15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
Ø90mm
TRIM FINISH:
grey
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
GU10 LED
C1
CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRE
(underside of waffle slab)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
3 x 1W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
MTS Consulting Limited
216
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
as per dimensions in the image
TRIM FINISH:
grey
DIFFUSER:
n/a
C2
CEILING MOUNTED ADJUSTABLE
SPOTLIGHT
(underside of waffle slab)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
In total lengths of 6m horizontal and 10.5m vertical
TRIM FINISH:
extruded aluminium profile structure, white
DIFFUSER:
polycarbonate diffuser screen
WG
PROFILE FIXTURE FOR PERIMETER
NICHE LIGHTING WITH WALL
WASHER OPTICS FOR AN EFFECTIVE
WALL GRAZING EFFECT
(underside of waffle slab)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
warm white - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
mounted to the underside of slab/mounted vertically on wall
MTS Consulting Limited
217
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in illustrations OAE
(depth is preferred to be less than indicated)
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel
DIFFUSER:
LAMP:
LED warm white
U1
Walk-over ground-recessed luminaire
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(main entrance)
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Protection class I, not more than 28 degress wide beam
SIZE:
As indicated in illustrations OAE
(depth is preferred to be less than indicated)
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel
DIFFUSER:
LAMP:
LED warm white
U2
Walk-over ground-recessed luminaire
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(main waiting area)
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Protection class I, not more than 28 degress wide beam
MTS Consulting Limited
218
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in illustrations OAE
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel or aluminium
DIFFUSER:
indicator light
LAMP:
LED warm to neutral white
U3
Walk-over ground-recessed luminaire
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(main waiting area steps)
3500K
POWER/WATTAGE:
3 x 1W approx.
IP RATING:
IP68
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Protection class I, narrow beam
SIZE:
not more than 200mm in diameter
(depth is preferred to be less than 150mm)
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel
DIFFUSER:
U4
Walk-over uplight light fixture to be
surrounded with pebbles rather than
fully floor recessed
(main entrance corridor on side next
to meeting rooms finished with
pebbles)
LAMP:
LED warm white - narrow beam 10°-15°
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
7W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Protection class I
MTS Consulting Limited
219
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in illustrations OAE
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel or aluminium
DIFFUSER:
optics to direct light onto the adjacent wall
LAMP:
LED warm to neutral white
U5
Walk-over ground-recessed luminaire
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(main waiting area ramp)
3500K
POWER/WATTAGE:
3 x 1W approx.
IP RATING:
IP68
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Protection class I, very narrow beam
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration OAE
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel and glass
DIFFUSER:
inner diffuser with opal polymeric and outer transparent
LAMP:
LED
F1
Floor Lamp
(main reception area)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
15W approx.
IP RATING:
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
To include built-in dimmer switch
MTS Consulting Limited
220
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration OAE
TRIM FINISH:
stainless steel and glass
DIFFUSER:
inner diffuser with opal polymeric and outer transparent
LAMP:
LED
F2
Table Lamp
(main waiting area)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W approx.
IP RATING:
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
SIZE:
20m
TRIM FINISH:
assembled on white flexible circuit with transparent silicone
sheath outer protection with end caps
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LEDs
N1
Lighting within reception counter
(main reception area)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
monochromatic white LEDs - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65 for the full undivided length strip, IP20 for connectors
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
To include all necessary LED drivers.
MTS Consulting Limited
221
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
6 lenghts of 3.7m each approx. at level 4 boardroom
TRIM FINISH:
assembled on white flexible circuit with transparent silicone
sheath outer protection with end caps
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LEDs
S2
Linear ledstrip lighting
in bulkhead recess
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
monochromatic white LEDs - 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65 for the full undivided length strip, IP20 for connectors
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
To include all necessary LED drivers.
MTS Consulting Limited
222
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
19m approx. at Level 0
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium structure with transparent top glass
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED - Narrow beam 10°
X1
Linear LED Luminaire
(floor mounted on external low wall
surface at Lv0)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
Placement
Light Flux
PLEASE NOTE: total length of luminaire is to be
taken from ACAD drawings provided for tender.
DO NOT use the 1240mm as indicated in the
illustration on the left - illustration was only
added to indicate width of fitting
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Adjustable light emission on horizontal axis
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
13m approx. at Level 3
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium structure with transparent top glass
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED - Narrow beam 10°
X2
Linear LED Luminaire
(wall mounted on external low wall
at Lv+3)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
Placement
Light Flux
PLEASE NOTE: total length of luminaire is to be
taken from ACAD drawings provided for tender.
DO NOT use the 1240mm as indicated in the
illustration on the left - illustration was only
added to indicate width of fitting
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Adjustable light emission on horizontal axis
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
222
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
9m approx. at Level 0, 2.5m at Level 1A
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium structure with transparent top glass
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED - Medium beam 40°
X3
Linear LED Luminaire
(mounted on external low wall flat
surface at Level 0 and level 1A)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
Placement
Light Flux
PLEASE NOTE: total length of luminaire is to be
taken from ACAD drawings provided for tender.
DO NOT use the 1240mm as indicated in the
illustration on the left - illustration was only
added to indicate width of fitting
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Adjustable light emission on horizontal axis
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right
TRIM FINISH:
Light grey powder coated die-cast aluminium
DIFFUSER:
Light-diffusing lenses to create 2 geometric beams of 15°
LAMP:
LED
X4
Wall light fixture with 2 beams
(wall mounted at Lv+2)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
2 x 7W approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
223
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right 0AE
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium with transparent or sandblasted glass
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
X5
Recessed round luminaire
(ceiling recessed at Lv0 -above fire
exit)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
15W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
6m approx. at Level +1
TRIM FINISH:
Polycarbonate tube
DIFFUSER:
n/a
Placement
Light Flux
LAMP:
LED
X6
Tube Light
(wall mounted at Lv+1 - above main
entrance)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W/m approx.
PLEASE NOTE: total length of luminaire is to be
taken from ACAD drawings provided for tender.
DO NOT use the 1554mm as indicated in the
illustration on the left - illustration was only
added to indicate width of fitting
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
224
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right 0AE
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium/brushed stainless steel
DIFFUSER:
Placement
Light Flux
LAMP:
LED - Bidirectional medium to wide beam 40°-65°
X7
Bidirectional wall mounted luminaire
(wall mounted at Lv0 - adjacent walls COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
to main entrance)
POWER/WATTAGE:
2x4W approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right 0AE
TRIM FINISH:
Stainless Steel
DIFFUSER:
Symmetric extra wide reflector
LAMP:
LED
X8
Wall Recessed Luminaire
(wall recessed open light effect at
Lv0)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
3 x 2W approx.
IP RATING:
IK10 20J
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
225
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right 0AE
TRIM FINISH:
Stainless Steel & clear tempered glass
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
X9
Recessed round LED uplights
(on door threshold and window
external sill of old facade)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
6W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
2.5m approx. at Level 1B, 5.5m at Level 2A
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium housing structure
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
X10
LED strip in aluminium housing
(Floor mounted above balcony and
behind balustrade of old facade)
Profile for LED Strip
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP68
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
226
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
SYMBOL
FACADE LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
51m approx. In 14 lengths at Levels 1,2 and 3
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium housing structure
X11
(as
indicated on
elevation)
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
LED strip in aluminium housing
(Vertically surface mounted outside
windows at Lv +1,+2,+3)
X11
(as
indicated on
plan)
Profile for LED Strip
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W/m approx.
IP RATING:
IP68
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
227
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right
TRIM FINISH:
White exterior finish with black interior finish
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
TD1
Ceiling mounted luminaire
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
(under pits at Lv+4 outside
boardroom and above external door) 3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W approx.
IP RATING:
IP53
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
230mm in diameter by 250mm deep
TRIM FINISH:
Stainless Steel
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
TR1
Floor recessed light fixture
(Lv+3 & Lv+4 terraces)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
14W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67 IK10
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
228
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right
TRIM FINISH:
Stainless Steel
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
LED
TR3
Floor recessed light fixture
(Lv+3 & Lv+4 terraces)
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
5W approx.
IP RATING:
IP67 IK10
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right
TRIM FINISH:
Aluminium grey
DIFFUSER:
n/a
LAMP:
TW1
Recessed wall luminaire - indirect
LED
lighting affect
(terrace perimeter at LV+3 and Lv+4) COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
11W approx.
IP RATING:
Protection Class I, IP65 IK06
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
MTS Consulting Ltd
229
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
SYMBOL
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
As indicated in the illustration on the right
TRIM FINISH:
Silver grey finish
DIFFUSER:
n/a clear glass
TW2
Wall mounted wall light - mounted at
a height of approximately 1800mm
above external FFL
(terrace at Lv+3 outside external
door)
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
3000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
10W approx.
IP RATING:
IP44
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
230V or integrated power supply
Uni-directional medium beam 30°
MTS Consulting Ltd
230
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
CODE
LIGHT FIXTURES
C43284
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
IMAGES / REMARKS
SIZE:
1280mm x 170mm x 95mm
TRIM FINISH:
Grey polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Clear polycarbonate
LAMP:
Fluorescent or LED equivalent
A
Car Parks and technIcal areas
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
2x28W or LED equivalent
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
SIZE:
1280mm x 170mm x 95mm
TRIM FINISH:
Grey polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Clear polycarbonate
LAMP:
Fluorescent or LED equivalent
B
Technical areas
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
1x28W
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
MTS Consulting Ltd
231
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SIZE:
Ø350mm
TRIM FINISH:
White polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Satin glass
LAMP:
Compact fluorescent or LED equivalent
C
Technical areas
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
2x18W
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
SIZE:
Ø350mm
TRIM FINISH:
White sheet steel or aluminium
DIFFUSER:
Satin glass
LAMP:
Compact fluorescent or LED equivalent
Stairs
D
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Cool white - 4000K
POWER/WATTAGE:
2x18W
IP RATING:
IP20
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
MTS Consulting Ltd
232
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SIZE:
450mm x 170mm x 10mm
TRIM FINISH:
Polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Clear polycarbonate
E1
Wall mounted, maintained
emergency directional exit
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Not applicable
POWER/WATTAGE:
7W approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
SIZE:
450mm x 170mm x 10mm
TRIM FINISH:
Polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Clear polycarbonate
Wall mounted, non-maintained
emergency
E1N
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Not applicable
POWER/WATTAGE:
7W approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
MTS Consulting Ltd
233
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SIZE:
450mm x 170mm x 10mm
TRIM FINISH:
Polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Clear polycarbonate
E2
Ceiling mounted, maintained
emergency directional exit
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Not applicable
POWER/WATTAGE:
7W approx.
IP RATING:
IP65
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
SIZE:
Ø120mm
TRIM FINISH:
White polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Not applicable
Recessed ceiling mounted,
maintained emergency
E3
LAMP:
LED
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Not applicable
POWER/WATTAGE:
2W approx.
IP RATING:
IP43
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to the more detailed technical specification.
MTS Consulting Ltd
234
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SIZE:
140mm x 140mm
TRIM FINISH:
White polycarbonate
DIFFUSER:
Not applicable
LAMP:
E4
Surface ceiling mounted, maintained LED
emergency
COLOUR RENDITION/TEMPERATURE:
Not applicable
POWER/WATTAGE:
2W approx.
IP RATING:
IP43
OTHERS REMARKS/ACCESSORIES:
Refer to more detailed technical specification.
MTS Consulting Ltd
235
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
The Tenderer shall provide a list of all materials and equipment, the name of the manufacturer and
the type or model number (where applicable) of all the types he is proposing to use on the
installation.
Once accepted and the Contract signed, the Contractor shall be bound to supply and install the
material detailed in the list forming part of the Tender, subject to the written approval of the
Engineer, authorising alternative material/equipment.
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
1.
Light Fitting Type ‘A’
2.
Light Fitting Type ‘B’
3.
Light Fitting Type ‘C’
4.
Light Fitting Type ‘D’
5.
Light Fitting Type ‘E1’
6.
Light Fitting Type ‘E1N’
7.
Light Fitting Type ‘E2’
8.
Light Fitting Type ‘E3’
9.
Light Fitting Type ‘E4’
10.
Light Fitting Type ‘L1’
11.
Light Fitting Type ‘L2’
12.
Light Fitting Type ‘L3’
13.
Light Fitting Type ‘L4’
14.
Light Fitting Type ‘L5’
15.
Light Fitting Type ‘L6’
16.
Light Fitting Type ‘L7’
17.
Light Fitting Type ‘A1’
18.
Light Fitting Type ‘A2’
19.
Light Fitting Type ‘A3’
20.
Light Fittings Type ‘CM1’
21.
Light Fittings Type ‘P1’
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
236
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
22.
Light Fittings Type ‘S1’
23.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP1’
24.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP2’
25.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP3’
26.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP4’
27.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP5’
28.
Light Fittings Type ‘CP6’
29.
Light Fittings Type ‘T1’
30.
Light Fittings Type ‘T2’
31.
Light Fittings Type ‘C1’
32.
Light Fittings Type ‘C2’
33.
Light Fittings Type ‘WG’
34.
Light Fittings Type ‘U1’
35.
Light Fittings Type ‘U2’
36.
Light Fittings Type ‘U3’
37.
Light Fittings Type ‘U4’
38.
Light Fittings Type ‘U5’
39.
Light Fittings Type ‘F1’
40.
Light Fittings Type ‘F2’
41.
Light Fittings Type ‘N1’
42.
Light Fittings Type ‘X1’
43.
Light Fittings Type ‘X2’
44.
Light Fittings Type ‘X3’
45.
Light Fittings Type ‘X4’
46.
Light Fittings Type ‘X5’
47.
Light Fittings Type ‘X6’
48.
Light Fittings Type ‘X7’
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
C43284
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
237
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER
49.
Light Fittings Type ‘X8’
50.
Light Fittings Type ‘X9’
51.
Light Fittings Type ‘X10’
52.
Light Fittings Type ‘X11’
53.
Light Fittings Type ‘TD1’
54.
Light Fittings Type ‘TR1’
55.
Light Fittings Type ‘TR3’
56.
Light Fittings Type ‘TW1’
57.
Light Fittings Type ‘TW2’
58.
Lighting Switches
59.
Waterproof Lighting Switches
60.
Metalclad Lighting Switches
61.
Socket Outlets
62.
UPS Socket Outlets
63.
Metalclad Socket Outlets
64.
Waterproof Socket Outlets
65.
Fused Connection Units
66.
Metalclad Fused Connection Units
67.
Waterproof
Units
68.
DP and TPN Rotary Isolators
69.
Metalclad TPN Isolators
70.
Distribution Boards
71.
Consumer Units
72.
MCBs
73.
RCDs
74.
RCBOs
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
Fused
C43284
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
Connection
238
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
75.
XLPE/SWA/PVC/Cu Cables
76.
XLPE/SWA/PVC/Cu (CWZ) Cables
77.
PVC Single Core Cables
78.
Waterproof DB Cabinets
79.
Galvanised Steel Cable Trunking
80.
Galvanised Steel Cable Tray
81.
PVC Cable Management Trunking
82.
Switchgear Panel SP-MSG
83.
Switchgear Panel SP-EMSG
84.
Switchgear Panel SP-UMSG
85.
Transient Surge Protection Units
86.
MCCBs
87.
Presence Detectors (IR-Surface
Type)
88.
Presence Detectors (IR-Recessed
Type)
89.
Presence Detectors (MWRecessed Type)
90.
Light Sensitive Switch
91.
Photocell IP55
92.
Lighting Switching Panel LSP-ERC
93.
Lighting Switching Panel LSP-EXF
94.
Earth Electrode Networks
95.
Timer Switches
96.
Power Poles
97.
VRF Air-conditioning Systems
98.
Split Type AC Systems
99.
Roof Top Unit
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
C43284
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
239
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
100.
Refrigerant Pipes
101.
Closed Cell Insulation
102.
PVC Drain Pipes
103.
Galvanised Steel Duct
104.
Phenolic Duct
105.
Volume Control Dampers
106.
Fire Dampers
107.
Air Devices
108.
Carpark Fan
109.
Archive Fan
110.
Toilet Extract Fans
111.
Fan Control Panel
112.
Cross Talk Attenuators
113.
Polypropylene Pipes
114.
UPVC Pipes
115.
PVC Waste Pipes
116.
Automatic Air Vents
117.
Water Storage Tanks
118.
Electric Water Heater
119.
DCW Booster Pump Set
120.
SCW Booster Pump Set
121.
Overflow Water Transfer Pumpset
122.
Water Level Control Panel
123.
BMS
124.
Data racks & accessories
125.
24 port RJ45 Cat 6 patch panel
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
C43284
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
240
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
ITEM
REF
MATERIAL
126.
24 port CAT 6 POE
Managed Ethernet Data switch
127.
24 port Fibre patch panels
128.
RJ45 socket outlets
129.
Cat6 UTP cable LSZH
130.
OM3 - Multimode 50/125µm LSZH
Fibre Optic Cable
131.
Galvanised Trunking
132.
Galvanised Cable tray
133.
Copper earth rods & accessories
134.
Stainless steel air finial
135.
Copper conductors & accessories
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
C43284
MANUFACTURER
REF. OF LITERATURE
ENCLOSED WITH TENDER
241
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Limited
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Limited
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Limited
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Limited
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
MTS Consulting Limited
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Limited
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
MTS Consulting Limited
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Limited
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Limited
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Limited
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Limited
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Limited
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION III – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LIGHT FITTINGS
The technical specifications for the decorative internal light fittings, terrace lighting and facade
lighting fittings have been included within the attached schedules. The technical specifications for
the non-decorative light fittings are included below. The cost for the supply of these light fittings
must be comprehensive so as to fully include equipment or anything required for these light
fittings to successfully operate. This is to include any transformers, ballasts, drivers, etc. etc. as
well as enclosures, suitable to house this equipment in the particular location where these will be
installed.
As per the relative BOQ item, the tenderer is to submit detailed lighting illumination design reports
for each building level, prepared using a recognized lighting design software program such as
Dialux, so as to corroborate the suitability of the chosen light fittings for these areas. The
illumination levels to be achieved must comply with those stipulated by The Society of Light and
Lighting (part of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers) and the relative local
legal notices. The reports must be submitted in both a coloured printed format and a digital
format.
2.0
NON-DECORATIVE LIGHT FITTINGS
Type A
Fluorescent lighting fixture, surface mounting type. The fixture shall have a fibreglass reinforced
polyester or injection moulded, UV stabilized, self-extinguishing polycarbonate housing, gear tray
and a smooth exterior, clear, UV stabilized, self-extinguishing, polycarbonate diffuser.
The fixture must be at least to IP65 degree of ingress protection. The overall shape of the fixture
must be with rounded edges to prevent dust build-up and facilitate cleaning.
The fixture shall be supplied complete with high frequency electronic control gear for 2 x 28 Watt
‘white’ fluorescent tubes, colour temperature 4000K, colour rendering index Ra85/1B, lumen
output 2600 lumens / tube.
The control gear shall consist of compact, lightweight, high frequency, non-dimmable, electronic
ballast, with pre-heating function for frequent switching applications, rated mains voltage 230
volts  10% at 50Hz mains frequency and an operating frequency in excess of 28kHz. The
ballast is to automatically break the electrical supply to the lamps when defective and operate
normally once the defective lamps are replaced. The control gear must comply with the latest
standards on electromagnetic compatibility. The lighting fixture must be suitable for direct
mounting on normally inflammable surfaces.
MTS Consulting Limited
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Type B
Similar to Type A above but the fixture shall be supplied complete with high frequency electronic
control gear for 1 x 28 Watt ‘white’ fluorescent tubes, colour temperature 4000K, colour rendering
index Ra85/1B, lumen output 2600 lumens / tube.
Type C
Wall or ceiling mounted light fitting, circular, gallery and ring made of white self-extinguishing
polycarbonate, fibreglass reinforced nylon or die-cast aluminium, internally ice etched glass
diffuser, aluminium reflecting parabola, complete with electronic control gear, operational voltage
rated at 230 volts, to operate 2 x 18 Watt compact fluorescent lamps, lumen output 1200 lumens /
lamp, colour temperature 4000K and a moulded silicon gasket, to achieve the IP 65 degree of
ingress protection. The lighting fixture must be suitable for direct mounting on normally
inflammable surfaces.
Type D
Decorative wall mounting type light fitting, round shaped, body made of enamelled steel or
brushed die-cast aluminium, diffuser in satin-finish glass, complete with 2x18 Watt compact
fluorescent lamps, colour temperature 3000K. Alternatively, fittings using LEDs of a light output
equivalent to the above shall also be considered. The fitting shall be supplied complete with high
frequency control gear. As these light fittings will be installed within the circulation spaces, a very
good aesthetical appearance is required. The lighting fixture must be suitable for direct mounting
on normally inflammable surfaces.
Type E1
Self-contained emergency ‘maintained’ type fitting suitable for wall-mounting, autonomous power
for a minimum of one hour.
The body consists of self-extinguishing, double-insulated
polycarbonate plastic, supplied complete with LEDs with an equivalent light output to a 24 Watt
fluorescent tube, having LEDs giving 400 lumens or more output on emergency mode.
The luminaries are to be equipped with low consumption electronic ballasts, rated to operate at
230 Volts. The light fittings are to be manufactured to EN/IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2-22 standards
and be complete with silicone gasket water proof, to achieve an IP 65 degree of ingress
protection. The power conversion kit must be housed in the enclosure of the fitting.
The clear polycarbonate diffuser shall be complete with pictograms complying with the European
Signs Directive Format, issued in 1996, having designs in white colour on a green background.
The colours must be to ISO 3864-1 standard requirements. The fitting must be complete with a
fully automatic constant current charging system, maintenance free, high temperature application
type, nickel cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries, mains and charge monitoring LED.
The fitting is to be supplied complete with a self-diagnostic, status and fault indicating, automatic
battery discharge / recharge ‘Autotest’ function, able to conduct a weekly emergency changeover
operation and lamp check and a quarterly emergency operation battery discharge and operational
duration check. Different coloured LEDs are to display the results of these tests.
The fixture must be mounted on a quick fix plug-in tray to simplify installation and easy removal of
the fitting. The lighting fixture must be suitable for direct mounting on normally inflammable
surfaces.
MTS Consulting Limited
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Type ‘E1N’
Identical in construction material to Type E1 above, but ‘non-maintained’ type and without the
directional pictograms.
Type ‘E2’
Similar in construction material to Type E1 above, but double sided, ‘maintained’ type fitting
suitable for surface ceiling slab-mounting, soffit ceiling mounting or edgewise wall mounting. All
the necessary brackets and pictograms must be included with the fittings.
Type E3
Self-contained, anti-panic emergency ‘non-maintained’ type fitting, suitable for flush recessing
with the soffit ceiling and having autonomous power for a minimum of one hour.
The body consists of self-extinguishing, double-insulated polycarbonate plastic, supplied
complete with a round, white coloured polycarbonate flange. It shall include a 1 to 2 Watt LED
lamp with an equivalent light output to a 24 Watt fluorescent tube, emitting 150 lumens or more
output on emergency mode. The fitting is to incorporate suitable lenses such that an illumination
of at least 0.5 lux is achieved per light fitting over a square area of 10 metres by 10 metres.
The fitting is to be supplied complete with a self-diagnostic, status and fault indicating, automatic
battery discharge / recharge ‘Autotest’ function, able to conduct a weekly emergency changeover
operation and lamp check and a quarterly emergency operation battery discharge and operational
duration check. Different coloured LEDs are to display the results of these tests.
The light fittings are to be manufactured to EN/IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2-22 standards. The
fitting is to achieve an IP 42 degree of ingress protection or better.
Type E4
Similar to Type E3 but the surface mounting type
Location of non-decorative light fittings
Type A:
Technical areas
Type B:
Technical areas
Type C:
Technical areas
Type D:
Stairs
Type E1:
Emergency Exit Directional Signage
Type E1N:
Emergency non-maintained lighting
Type E2:
Emergency Exit Directional Signage
Type E3:
Emergency non-maintained lighting
Type E4:
Emergency non-maintained lighting
MTS Consulting Limited
15
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
3.0
C43284
DECORATIVE LIGHT FITTINGS
The technical specifications for the cost of the decorative internal light fittings, terrace lighting and
facade lighting fittings has been included within the attached schedules. The cost for the supply of
these light fittings must be comprehensive so as to fully include anything required for these light
fittings to successfully operate. This is to include and transformers, ballasts, drivers, etc. etc. as
well as enclosures, suitable to house this equipment in the particular location where these will be
installed.
4.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all flexible conduit lengths, from the
ceiling slab up to the light fitting as necessary, fixture mounting accessories such as screws,
washers, anchor / expansion bolts, distance spacers, fitting supporting flange plates or brackets
etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be so required.
Looping-in between successive lighting points in all the soffited areas, irrespective if tiled or solid
soffit, shall be done within the lighting fixtures and not at slab level.
Only in non-soffited areas will the use of three-core PVC double-sheathed cable drop, from the
lighting point at slab level to the light fitting, be permitted.
5.0
LIGHTING POINTS
The cost of lighting points, unless specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities, shall include the selfextinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC conduit under floor tiling, in wall chase or partitioning or
surface above soffit, where applicable, the required electrical accessories, lighting switches, and the
cables specified. In some areas, where the very low headroom will not permit the installation of a
soffit ceiling, white PVC mini-trunking is to be installed.
All switches are to be flush-mounted type, ivory white moulded plastic, 10AX inductive load rated
moulded plastic faceplate type. All switches are to have an identical aesthetical appearance.
All keyswitches are to be rated at 16A or higher and must each be supplied complete with the
relative key.
Galvanized steel conduit and metalclad wiring accessories, for a surface installation, shall be used
where specified and in all areas where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical
damage. All metalclad switches are also to be 10AX inductive load rated. The relative switch boxes
are to be earthed.
In all exterior or damp atmospheric areas, weatherproof switches to IP66 degree of ingress
protection are to be utilised.
MTS Consulting Limited
16
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
6.0
C43284
EMERGENCY DIRECTIONAL EXIT AND NON-MAINTAINED ANTI-PANIC
LIGHTING POINTS
The cost of the emergency directional exit and non-maintained anti-panic lighting point, unless
specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities, shall include the self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge,
PVC conduit in chase or surface above soffit and the cables specified in the distribution board
schedules.
Galvanized steel conduit for a surface installation shall be used where specified and in all areas
where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical damage.
All emergency directional exit and non-maintained anti-panic lighting circuits must run in a totally
separate conduit.
7.0
GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET POINTS
The cost of socket outlet points, unless specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities, shall include the
self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC conduit under floor tiling, in wall chase or partitioning or
surface above soffit, the 3 x 4mm² PVC cables for radial circuits, or 6 x 2.5mm² PVC cables for ring
circuit, and the 13ampere, ivory white colour, shuttered, flush type, double pole switched, British
Standard, moulded plastic faceplated double socket outlets.
Galvanised steel conduit and metalclad wiring accessories for a surface installation shall be used
where specified and in all areas where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical
damage. All metalclad wiring accessories are to be earthed.
8.0
UPS SOCKET OUTLET POINTS
The cost of socket outlet points, unless specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities, shall include the
self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC conduit under floor tiling, in wall chase or partitioning or
surface above soffit, the 3 x 2.5mm² PVC cables for ring circuit, and the 13ampere, ivory white
colour, shuttered, flush type, double pole switched, British Standard, moulded plastic faceplated
double socket outlets.
The socket outlets are to include a red coloured switch knob for each outlet.
Galvanised steel conduit and metalclad wiring accessories for a surface installation shall be used
where specified and in all areas where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical
damage. All metalclad wiring accessories are to be earthed.
9.0
WATERPROOF SOCKET OUTLET POINTS
Similar as per general-purpose socket outlet points, but to include one British Standard, switched
type, double socket outlet, to IP66 degree of ingress protection. The IP rating of the socket outlet
is to be retained even during the use of the socket outlet. The enclosures are to be in UV
stabilized polycarbonate. The socket outlets are to be supplied complete with proprietary
mounting frames or bezels when installed flush to walls or tiling.
MTS Consulting Limited
17
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
10.0
C43284
FUSED CONNECTION UNIT POINTS (13A DP)
The cost of the fused connection unit points, unless specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities, shall
include the self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC conduit under floor tiles, in wall chase or
2
surface above soffit, 3 x 4mm PVC cables for radial circuits, the 13 ampere switched fused
connection unit, ivory white in colour, fuse, complete with neon indicator lamp, flexible cable outlet
knock-out and a switch. Cost is to include a provision for a cable termination outlet box and relative
2
wiring, 8 metres away from the fused connection unit, using 3 x 2.5mm PVC cables between the
fused connection unit point and the flexible cable outlet.
Unswitched type of fused connection units are to be used in all instances where the unit is
supplying a fire alarm panel, intruder alarm panel, door access unit, fire evacuation mimic panel
or similar essential or alarm panels, as applicable.
Galvanized steel conduit and metalclad wiring accessories for a surface installation shall be used
where specified and in all areas where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical
damage. All metalclad wiring accessories are to be earthed.
11.0
WATERPROOF FUSED CONNECTION UNIT POINTS (13A DP)
Similar as per fused connection unit points, but to include one switched type fused connection unit
outlet to IP66 degree of ingress protection. The IP rating of the fused connection unit outlet is to
be retained even during use. The enclosures are to be in UV stabilized polycarbonate. The
outlets are to be supplied complete with proprietary mounting frames or bezels when installed
flush to walls or tiling.
12.0
20A OR 32A DP SWITCH POINTS
Ditto as per Fused Connection Unit (13A DP) points, but to include one 20A or 32A DP moulded
plastic faceplated switch, complete with neon indicator and the cables specified in the distribution
board schedules or drawing.
Galvanized steel conduit and metalclad wiring accessories for a surface installation shall be used
where specified and in all areas where the electrical installation may be exposed to mechanical
damage. All metalclad wiring accessories are to be earthed.
13.0
16A, 20A OR 32A DP WEATHERPROOF ROTARY ISOLATOR POINTS
The cost of the rotary isolator points shall include the self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC
conduit under floor tiling, in wall chase or partitioning or surface above soffit or galvanized steel
conduit where a metalclad installation is specified, one 16A, 20A or 32A DP rotary,
polycarbonate, surface mounting isolator and the cables specified in the distribution board
schedules. The isolators are to have a facility for padlocking the switch handle in the ‘off’ position,
in compliance with international LOCKOUT / TAGOUT procedures. All isolators are to be to IP 65
degree of ingress protection. . Cost is to include a provision for a cable termination outlet box
2
and relative wiring, 5m away from the isolator point, using 3 x 2.5mm PVC cables between the
isolator point and the flexible cable outlet.
MTS Consulting Limited
18
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
14.0
C43284
16A, 32A OR 63A TPN ROTARY ISOLATOR POINTS
The cost of the rotary isolator points shall include the self-extinguishing rigid, heavy gauge, PVC
conduit under floor tiling, in wall chase or partitioning or surface above soffit or galvanized steel
conduit where a metalclad installation is specified, one 16A, 32A or 63A TPN rotary,
polycarbonate, surface mounting isolator and the cables specified in the distribution board
schedules. The isolators are to have a facility for padlocking the switch handle in the ‘off’ position,
in compliance with international LOCKOUT / TAGOUT procedures. All isolators are to be to IP 65
degree of ingress protection. Cost is to include a provision for a cable termination outlet box and
relative wiring, 5m away from the isolator point, using the specified cables, between the isolator
point and the flexible cable outlet.
15.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
All TP&N distribution boards and SP&N consumer units shall be metalclad enclosure surface
type, be provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral
mainswitch, rated as specified. Distribution boards are to be supplied with an integral threephase pan assembly busbar system.
All distribution boards shall be complete with glazed circuit charts indicating the ways, number,
equipment, rating of MCB, size of cable used and phase to which equipment is connected.
Distribution Boards, Consumer Units and switchgear shall be labelled with white-black Traffolyte
in 3mm high lettering.
The handle of the mainswitch of each distribution board or consumer unit is to be padlockable in
the ‘off’ position, in compliance with international LOCKOUT / TAGOUT procedures, using an
appropriate means of locking.
All the handles of all the other RCDs, MCCBs, MCBs or RCBOs, in all distribution boards, are to
have the facility to be padlockable in the ‘off’ position, in compliance with international LOCKOUT
/ TAGOUT procedures.
Only one full set of locking brackets/clips/tags is to be provided, and this is to correspond to that
distribution board which has the largest number of outgoing functional units (MCBs, RCDs,
RCBOs). Proprietary brackets/clips/tags etc. are to be used for locking purposes, as made by the
same supplier of the functional unit.
The distribution boards are to be generally protected from fire outbreak by a main earth leakage
circuit breaker, current rated and trip current rated as per the distribution board schedules. All the
main RCDs are to be four pole Type–S, time–delayed type, to incorporate a filtering device,
preventing the risk of nuisance tripping due to transient voltages and currents.
For distribution boards having a main incomer rated in excess of 100 amperes three-phase, an
earth leakage relay, having time delay setting facilities, is to be installed. In such cases, the main
incomer is to be a four pole MCCB having built-in shunt trip mechanism. The mechanism is to be
operated by a separate torroid coil, which will detect the leakage currents. Distribution Boards are
to be supplied complete with steel enclosure extension boxes, having suitable DIN rails, for the
installation of the residual current devices, where applicable.
Distribution Boards, Consumer Units and switchgear shall be labelled with white-black Traffolyte
in 3mm high lettering. All the distribution board doors are to include a lockable door and key,
which key is to be common to all the distribution boards.
MTS Consulting Limited
19
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Where specified, the metal enclosures of the distribution boards are to be housed within a
suitably sized, lockable Class 2, fibre glass reinforced polyester cabinet, achieving an IP65
degree of ingress protection or better and rendering the DB installation waterproof. The enclosure
must be supplied with a solid panel door and not a glass door.
16.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal magnetic
overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit condition,
Category of duty: C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for
o
normal current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35 C.
All miniature circuit breakers, which shall be supplied from the same manufacturer of the
Distribution Board or the Consumer unit, are to have a facility for padlocking the handle in the ‘off’
position, in compliance with international LOCKOUT / TAGOUT procedures.
17.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs. All RCDs are
to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is to be C Curve, breaking
capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
All RCBOs, which shall be supplied from the same manufacturer of the Distribution Board or the
Consumer unit, are to have a facility for padlocking the handle in the ‘off’ position, in compliance
with international LOCKOUT / TAGOUT procedures.
18.0
FUSE SWITCHES, SWITCH FUSES AND ISOLATORS
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and shall be
constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live busbars.
Main switches and isolators shall have a category of duty AC-23.
The weatherproof isolators are to be metalclad to IP 54 protection.
The weatherproof isolator up to 63 amperes on the roof can be a rotary-control switch, industrial
plastic type to IP.65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP.54 protection.
MTS Consulting Limited
20
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
19.0
C43284
TIMER SWITCH
The stand alone timer switch shall be the digital type, suitable to operate at 230 Volts, 50 Hertz
electrical supply, and shall have a minimum of one normally open and one normally closed
contacts, the contacts being rated at 16 amperes. The timer shall have a 24-hour program, 100
hours working reserve.
20.0
LIGHT SENSITIVE SWITCH CONTROLLER AND PHOTO-ELECTRIC CELL
The light sensitive switch controller shall be client adjustable between 5 to 2000 lux, so as to
pulse the contactors and switch-on the lighting circuits at sunset, off at sunrise. The switch is to
include a 16A changeover contact.
The controller is to have a manual bypass switch, installed in parallel to it and not forming part of
the Light Sensitive Switch itself, which is to be easily accessible.
The light sensitive switch controller is to be supplied complete with a weatherproof photoelectric
cell, to IP 55 degree of ingress protection. The photoelectric cell is to be installed on a bracket in
an appropriate location, exterior to the room. Cabling between the cell and the light sensitive
switch controller is to be included.
21.0
PRESENCE DETECTORS
The recessed, soffit mounting type, PIR (Passive Infrared) presence detectors shall monitor the
detection zone for occupancy; if a person is sensed then the detector will automatically turn the
lighting on. When the area is vacated, the lighting will turn off after a preset time delay.
The PIR (Passive Infrared) presence detectors shall be installed in the smaller spaces. The
o
detectors shall have a 360 detection and an operating surveyed area diameter of 7m or more,
when installed at a height of 2.5 metres, 8m or more, when installed at a height of 3.5 metres
The detector shall have an adjustable timer to control its operation from 5 minutes to 30 minutes.
It shall be able to operate a 4A inductive lamp load, directly or via a power relay, the latter, if
required, and be supplied complete within a plastic enclosure.
The recessed, soffit mounting type, Microwave presence detectors shall monitor the detection
zone for occupancy; if a person is sensed then the detector will automatically turn the lighting on.
When the area is vacated, the lighting will turn off after a preset time delay. The detectors shall
o
have a 360 detection and an operating surveyed area diameter of 12m or more, when installed
at a height of 2.5 metres, 16m or more, when installed at a height of 3.5 metres. These detectors
must be able to detect and operate even at the slightest of motion.
Surface mounting PIR (Passive Infrared) presence detectors shall monitor any movement within
o
the car park areas so as to automatically turn the lighting on. The detectors shall have a 270
detection and an operating detection range of 12m or more, when installed at a height of 2.5
metres. Other product features are to be similar to the above.
MTS Consulting Limited
21
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
22.0
C43284
CABLES
Single core cables in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors, PVC
insulation, voltage grade 450 / 750 volts, to BS 6004 and also be the self-extinguishing type to BS
and IEC 60332-1-2, unless otherwise specified. Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be
suitably terminated with lugs or soldered, at least at the Distribution Board or Consumer Unit
connection end.
Where specified, single-core Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH or LS0H or LSFH) cables are to
be to BS 7211.
Multi-core XLPE/SWA/LSZH/CU cables are to be to BS 6724 whilst XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU cables
are to be to BS5467. Both shall be to 600/1000V voltage grade, self-extinguishing type, unless
otherwise specified.
Armoured clamps, where applicable, shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad
gear. The glands shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two
locknuts.
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be allowed
without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for cable conductor
phasing from the main switchboard (that is, L1,L2,L3). Feeder terminals shall be correspondingly
marked at each end.
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at every 2.5
metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable identification tag at
every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at both ends at the switchgear.
The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the source and the switchgear at its
termination.
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue to
function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ classification in
accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic (mica/glass) material. All
cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends.
23.0
CABLE MANAGEMENT TRUNKING
The three-compartment cable management trunking shall be in moulded plastic material, of 100 x
50mm dimensions. This trunking shall be fixed in short lengths at low level to the client’s desking
to house the wiring accessories. Lengths shall be as listed in the Bill of Quantities,
It must be supplied complete with all the necessary end caps, cable dividers and accessory
mounting boxes etc. for a complete installation.
MTS Consulting Limited
22
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
24.0
C43284
POWER POLES
The Power Pole shall stand between the ceiling and top of centrally located desking.
This shall be manufactured from a square section in anodised aluminium. No wiring accessories
will be installed within the power poles.
Each power pole shall be approximately 3m long.
The post shall be top entry and have a different compartment for the power and extra low voltage
services.
The wiring to the power poles are to be fed from the trunking running above soffits and through
rigid and then flexible conduit up to the pole. For flexibility an extra 2 metres length of flexible
conduit (including wiring) is to be left coiled above soffit.
25.0
SWITCHGEAR PANELS
The MCCB Switchgear Panels shall include the following items and switchgear panel sections:




Overcurrent Four Pole Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for the incoming power supply
fixed mounting type.
Overcurrent outgoing protection MCCBs, fixed mounting type
Instrumentation and Energy Consumption Meters
Adequate labelling, highlighting the dangers of electrocution, which may result from the unauthorized opening of sections of the panelboards.
25.1
General Construction
The switchgear panels shall be suitable for indoor use and be of the freestanding type,
with possibilities for top main feeder cables or busduct entry, with top and bottom cable or
busduct exit. The panelboard shall be suitable for an electrical supply system of 400
volts, 50Hz three-phase and neutral.
The panel shall be at least to IP31 degree of protection. Switchgear panels rated above
630 amperes shall be to Form 2B, Type 2 switchgear separation rating or higher. The
type of cable, which will primarily be connected to and exiting from this panelboard shall
be the XLPE/SWA/PVC/CU type, which must thus be taken into consideration when
designing this panelboard.
The panelboard shall be supplied complete with three-phase, neutral and earth high
conductivity copper busbars, rated as per main incomer. The three-phase busbars and
neutral bar shall be rated at 100% capacity, the earthing bar at 50% busbar rating or
more. The earth bar shall be running internally to full length of the panelboard, solidly
bonded to the steel frame close to the gland plates. The busbars are to be manufactured
from hard drawn copper throughout, fully fault tested and certified to withstand a
symmetrical fault level of 36kA RMS for 1 second.
The cubicles, switch chassis, access doors, covers and all the main ferrous components
shall be manufactured from mild electro-zinc plated sheet steel. The general construction of
the cubicle shall include adequate gaskets to give sufficient protection against the ingress of
vermin, yet giving ample natural ventilation flow within the panelboard. All outgoing MCCBs
shall be labelled with white-black traffolyte in 3mm high lettering.
MTS Consulting Limited
23
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
25.2
C43284
Main Incomer
The main incomer for these switchgear panels shall be a fixed-mounting four-pole Moulded
Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) rated as per drawing or connection schedule, complete with
an automatic overcurrent release unit, as specified below.
Data of the main incomer MCCB is as follows:

Rated current at operating temperature: As specified at 400 volts.

Rated operating temperature: 45 degrees Celcius.

Operating temperature range: -20 to +70 degrees Celcius.

Rated service voltage: exceeding 660 volts

Rated Insulation Voltage:1000 volts

Current Setting: 0.4 to 1 x In

Rated Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Current Capacity (Icu): 36kA (RMS)

Rated Service Breaking Capacity Short Circuit Current Capacity (Ics): 36kA (RMS)

Rated Short Time withstand Current (Icw):

Short Time Rated: 1 second

Mechanism:Trip free, spring assisted hand closing type

Number of Poles: 4 (complete with full-sized neutral)

Circuit Breaker Frame Type: Fixed-mounting type

Protection functions are to include overload protection with inverse long time-delay
trip and instantaneous short-circuit circuit protection with adjustable trip current
setting.
The operating mechanism/handle of the MCCB needs to have locking facilities, in
compliance with the international LOGOUT/TAGOUT operating safety procedures.

25.3
36kA (RMS)
Outgoing MCCBs
The outgoing Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) shall be the three pole, fixedmounting type, rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated ultimate short circuit
breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36kA for 1 second at 400 volts.
All MCCBs, rated up to and including 160 amperes, are to be the thermomagnetic
release type, having a thermal current adjustable threshold setting from 0.7 to 1 x In and
a magnetic current fixed threshold setting of 10xIn.
All MCCBs, rated at 320 amperes or higher, are to be the electronic, microprocessor
based, release mechanism type, having a thermal current adjustable threshold setting
from 0.4 to 1 x In and a magnetic current fixed threshold setting of 10 x In.
Protection functions are to include overload protection with inverse long time-delay trip
and instantaneous trip short-circuit circuit protection with adjustable trip current setting.
The operating mechanism/handle of the MCCBs needs to have locking facilities, in
compliance with the international LOGOUT/TAGOUT operating safety procedures.
MTS Consulting Limited
24
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
25.4
C43284
Instrumentation and Consumption Meters
The Switchgear Panels are to be supplied complete with a multi-function power meter to
monitor the total load of the switchgear panel.
Each multi-function power meter is to measure RMS volts, RMS amps, power factor, kW,
KVAr, kVA, kWH, Hz, Maximum Demand in kVA and Maximum Demand in kW. The multimeter needs to have the facility for the connection and be addressable via a BMS for remote
monitoring purposes, hence these are to be supplied complete with the necessary RS 485
connection module.
The relevant connection hardware, excluding the computer and the software program are
to be provided with this package.
Where specified in the drawing, it shall also be supplied with the specified number of
electricity consumption meters, so as to monitor the energy consumption on selected
outgoing ways. These consumption meters shall be the digital, electronic type, complete
with a 5 digit LED or LCD screen display. It shall operate at a nominal voltage of 400
Volts at 50 Hertz, and be the direct connection type or include current transformers.
The meter is to be to Class 1 precision (1% accuracy) according to EN62053-21, giving a
reading update every one second and be able to operate at temperatures reaching 50
degrees Celsius or higher. The availability of the energy consumption reading is to be
retained and guaranteed, even upon the interruption of the mains power supply.
One of the multi-function meter within SP-MSG shall be the two-tariff type meter suitable
for measuring the power generated by the PVs.
26.0
TRANSIENT SURGE PROTECTOR
The lightning and transient over-voltage or surge suppressor shall be suitable to control all
transient voltages to a suitable low level on phase/neutral, phase/earth and neutral/earth modes.
The unit shall have LEDs indicating its present protection level status.
The Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) shall be a Type I model, according to EN
61643-11 standard, or a Class 1 model according to IEC 61643-1, when installed at the power
entrance location of the building, thus connected to the mains incoming electrical switchgear.
A Type 2 or a Class II TVSS model is to be installed to protection sub-distribution panels or
distribution boards, to EN 61643-11 and IEC 61643-1 standards respectively.
The Transient Surge Protector shall have the following characteristics:





Maximum discharge withstand current: Imax per phase (8/20 microseconds wave): 65kA
Maximum impulse withstand current: Iimp per phase (10/350 microseconds wave): 25kA
Nominal continuous operating voltage: Un: 230 Volts for a 1 Phase system (L-N) / 400
Volts for a 3 Phase system (L–L)
Maximum continuous operating voltage: Uc: 255 Volts for a 1 Phase system (L-N) / 440
Volts for a 3 Phase system (L-L)
Voltage protection Level: Up:
Less than 700V for a 5kA discharge current
Less than 1100V for a 10kA discharge current
Less than 1500V for a 35kA discharge current

Number of poles and modules: 4 for 3 phase 400V/50Hz system
2 for 1 phase 230V/50Hz system
MTS Consulting Limited
25
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems

C43284
Consist of a base and plug-in replacement module provided with a status indicator to
show the following:
green: surge protector operational
orange or red : surge protector needs replacement


27.0
Can be equipped with auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring purpose
The lightning and transient over-voltage or surge protector must be housed within a
transparent polycarbonate box, for visual inspection purposes.
LIGHTING SWITCHING PANELS ( LSP-ERC / LSP-EXF )
The control of the lighting installation in the Reception area at Level 0 and on the external facade
shall each be via a programmable intelligent system with manual over-rides. This system will
utilise a combination of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) or equivalent intelligent
electronic equipment, suitably networked power contactors and manual over-riding switches.
All such equipment shall be enclosed within and be included in the cost of the specified Lighting
Switching Panel LSP-ERC and the LSP-EXF within the issued Bill of Quantities. All components
must be suitably physically segregated, whilst all contactor coils must operate at extra low voltage
(less than 50 volts). Reference is to be made to the attached schedules.
The principle of operation of each LSP shall be that each of the individual switch outputs can be
controlled via an individual timer channel within the PLC. The PLC shall control each specified
output circuit, via a contactor, as per its pre-programme. Each of the light outputs must be
individually programmable and timer selectable and controlled from the PLC. This will permit the
operator to switch-on or switch-off any of the individual circuits at a pre-set time, according to the
schedule of operation of the building.
A feature required is that it must also be possible to time programme the PLC outputs in switching
groups to create pre-determined lighting scenes, which will reflect the lighting intensity required
within the building during different times of the day. The facilities to programme different daily
lighting scenes or switching combinations must be provided.
For example, such a scene may include a switching group with a very limited number of circuits
being switched-on, which will be enough to permit the janitorial cleaning of the building or night
security lighting.
The PLC unit must incorporate a user interface, for easy operation by the user. The software
must be very user friendly, not requiring deep insight in information technology programming
systems. A battery back-up system shall be incorporated within the LSPs, such that none of the
PLC programmes are lost upon a temporary power failure, for no reason whatsoever. The host
PLC shall be located within the relative LSP.
All equipment shall be enclosed in a metalclad enclosure.
LSP-EXF shall be supplied complete with a 32A TPN contactor at the input. The operation of
LSP-EXF shall be via a light sensitive switch controller and a weatherproof photoelectric cell. The
controller/cell shall pulse the 32A TPN contactor, which, in turn will switch-on the lighting circuits
at sunset, off at sunrise.
MTS Consulting Limited
26
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
28.0
C43284
EARTH BAR
The Earth Bar within the main electrical switchroom at Level -2 shall consist of
500mmx50mmx5mm copper busbar length, installed on insulated busbar supports to the wall.
The busbars shall have pre-drilled holes for the bolting of cable lugs, able to take M6 bolts.
29.0
EARTH ELECTRODE NETWORKS
An earth electrode network, to maximum ohmage value of 5 ohms, is to be installed at Level -3.
The network is to be connected to the earth busbar within the electrical switchroom at Level -2,
using 25 x 3mm PVC insulated copper tape (green/yellow insulation). A separate tape run shall
be installed from each earth electrode up to the earth bar.
The tape runs shall be routed and fixed to walls or columns. The tape is to be installed within
galvanized steel pipes where the tape runs may be susceptible to mechanical damage, the cost
of which is also to be included within this item.
MTS Consulting Limited
27
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION IV - HVAC SYSTEMS
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The scope is to supply, install, test and commission all the HVAC systems required for the
project. The systems consists of vapour compressions systems type, VRF, Split and/or any other
system as proposed in the following specifications and subsequent documents forming part of
this document. The units shall operate using refrigerant R410A unless approved otherwise by the
Engineer.
The contractor is to ensure best possible workmanship and installation quality. Sample
installations are to be carried out and approved by the Engineer prior to execution for any of the
areas which would be requested by the same.
2.0
DESIGN CONDITIONS
The equipment shall be selected to satisfy the conditions listed below.
Air Condition
Summer
Winter
Indoor dry bulb temperature ( C)
22 to 24
19 to 21
Indoor relative humidity (%)
50 to 60
NA
37
7
43
N/A
o
o
Design outdoor dry bulb ( C)
o
Maximum ambient operating temperature ( C)
3.0
AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT - VRF SYSTEM & SPLIT UNITS
3.1
Outdoor Unit
All compressor motors in excess of 2hp shall be inverter driven. Inverter drives shall be
installed within the enclosure and supplied by the manufacturer of the outdoor
condensing unit.
For the three-phase units, a suitable motor protector is to be included for each outdoor.
The motor protector will automatically isolate the power supply to the motor in the event
of either one or a combination of the following:




MTS Consulting Limited
A power phase loss
A power phase reversal
A 9% voltage difference between phases
The voltage goes below the under voltage setting
The voltage goes above the over voltage setting
28
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The tripping unit should be able to reset automatically or manually after a pre-set time
delay in the range of 20 to 300 seconds.
All units shall be capable to operate in reverse cycle mode such that they would be able
to provide heating/cooling during winter/summer seasons respectively.
The outdoor units shall be constructed from galvanised sheet metal and baked finished
following application of suitable primers and finishing coats by the manufacturer.
The outdoor units’ condenser coils shall be multi-pass, cross-finned tube, with corrosion
protected aluminium fins which are mechanically bonded to copper tubes.
All outdoor units shall include neoprene vibration absorbing mountings to attenuate
vibration produced noise whilst the units are in operation. These mountings shall also
isolate the unit’s base from the finished level in order to ensure that the unit’s base would
be maintained in isolation from any water condensate / rain water collection beneath the
units during winter season.
Wall hung outdoor units shall be installed on galvanised steel brackets which would also
include suitable vibration isolating mountings.
3.2
Indoor Units
The type of indoor units to be used shall be in accordance with the schedules included
drawings. All indoor units shall be supplied with wall mounted wired controllers, unless
specifically stated otherwise. Controllers shall include the following operating features:






On / Off
Timer mode start / stop and on / off
Temperature setting
Air flow direction (where applicable)
Operating mode
Fan speed control, including auto
Filter cleaning indication
All indoor units shall include a washable cleanable filter on the return air side.
The following VRF indoor units shall include condensate pump as standard by the
manufacturer:

Cassettes (4-way, 2-way, 1-way)
Concealed (standard, slim type)
With regards to split type indoor units the pumps shall only be supplied with cassette type
units.
3.3
Power and control cable wiring
For split units, a power supply in the vicinity of the indoor unit shall be provided by others.
The contractor is to allow for the power and control cabling which would be required
between indoor and outdoor unit, including a suitable rotary isolator switch in the vicinity
of the outdoor unit.
MTS Consulting Limited
29
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Electrical supply to each VRF system shall be provided by others in the vicinity of both
indoor and outdoor units. The contractor shall wire each unit to its respective supply
point. However, the contractor is to include for all necessary control cabling required
between the units.
All power wiring installed internally and not within reach to occupants, shall be enclosed
in PVC flexible conduit. All power wiring installed elsewhere shall either be armoured or
enclosed in a flexible galvanised steel conduit.
3.4
Remote Monitoring and Control (applicable to VRF systems)
The contractor shall supply and install proprietary software for the monitoring, control and
operation of the VRF system(s) which shall be installed for the project. The software
shall be capable to provide the following facilities for each indoor unit:
Monitoring of: operation of indoor units (ON/OFF), temperature set points, space
temperature, fan speed setting and system operating mode
 Control of: set point temperature, ON/OFF operation, fan speed and settable
timer control
The system shall be capable to monitor the operation of the outdoor units and perform
reset functions as would be required by the operator.
Where heat recovery ventilation systems will be installed, the software shall be capable
to monitor all entering and leaving temperatures from the unit operating mode and fan
speed settings. In addition control facilities for these shall also be incorporated.
The contractor is to ensure that the control cable of the system include for any addition
wiring which would be necessary for interfacing the system with a local PC or through an
Local Area Network.
Operational control and monitoring shall be interfaced with the project Building
Management System. For further details, refer to the BMS section of these technical
specifications.
4.0
ROOF TOP UNIT (RTU)
Roof top unit shall be air-cooled and equipped with two hermetic orbiting scroll compressors with
revisable heat pump operating on 410A refrigerant gas. The unit shall be capable of delivering the
fresh air supply at a temperature of 20ºC (+/- 1ºC) on an external intake temperature of 35ºC.
RTU casing must be manufactured from galvanised steel materials which shall be suitably primed
and finished with baked glass paint by the manufacturer, suitable for local external environment
where the unit shall be installed. All hinges, brackets and other similar accessories shall be
manufactured from stainless steel AISI 304 and adequately greased.
Compressors shall be capable of operating in two capacity steps with motor over-temperature,
over-current devices and protection against excessive gas discharge temperature. Compressors
shall be fitted on rubber anti-vibration mounts and complete with oil charge. An oil heater is
automatically switched on at the compressor shut-down to prevent oil dilution by the refrigerant.
The internal exchanger for the ambient air pre-treatment direct expansion finned exchanger shall
be made from copper pipes in staggered rows and mechanically expanded to the fin collars. The
fins shall be made from aluminium with a corrugated surface and adequately distanced to ensure
the maximum heat exchange efficiency.
MTS Consulting Limited
30
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The external exchanger for the energy recovery of the air in expulsion finned exchanger shall be
made from copper pipes arranged in staggered rows and mechanically expanded for better
adherence to the collar of the fins. The fins shall be made from aluminium with a special
corrugated surface, set at suitable distance apart to ensure maximum heat exchange efficiency.
The outlet and ejection fans shall be of type plug fans without scroll with reverse blades driven by
an electronically controlled brushless dc motors with direct coupling. No transmission sizing shall
be needed.
The circuit shall be completed with:









Refrigerant charge
Liquid flow and moisture indicator
High pressure switch
Low pressure switch
Dehydrator filter
Thermostatic expansion valve
Non-return valve
4-way reverse cycle valve
Liquid receiver
The external air intake side shall have the following requisite:
Pleated filter for greater filtering surface, made up of galvanized plate frame with
galvanized and electric-welded protective mesh, and regenerable filtering media made
from polyester fibre sized with synthetic resins. G4 efficiency according to CEN-EN 779
standard (Eurovent class EU4/5 - average efficiency 90.1% ASHRAE 52-76 Atm). Selfextinguishing (resistance to fire class 1 - DIN53438).
The condensate collecting tray shall be made of aluminum alloy 1050 H24 with anti-condensate
insulation, welded and equipped with threaded discharge coupling.
The Power Section shall include:





Fan overload circuit breakers
Compressor circuit breaker
Auxiliary circuit fuse
Main door lock isolator switch
COOL/HEAT button for the operating mode change, activation only fan mode
and active mode signal




Signal led unit in ON
Signal led compressor state
Unit operation or ventilation only selection button
CLEAN function activation for a fixed time
The Control Section shall include:





MTS Consulting Limited
Room temperature control
Energy optimization of compressor operation
Automatic regulation of operating mode (heating, free cooling, cooling)
Compressor overload protection and timer
Self-diagnosis system with immediate display of the error code
31
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems

C43284
Differential pressure switch for dirty air filters
The control keypad shall include:












Display of the set values and the error codes
Display of the parameter index
On/Off button
UP/DOWN buttons for setting the parameters
Alarm button to display the list of alarms
Status button to display the status list
Keys for display menu
ENTER button for programming
SET button to set operating inputs
Selected function signal LED
Signal led ventilation state
OPERATING INPUTS, CONDITIONS and ALARMS menu state signal led
Operational control and monitoring shall be interfaced with the project Building Management
System. For further details, refer to the BMS section of these technical specifications.
5.0
REFRIGERANT PIPING
The inter-connecting pipework between the indoor and outdoor units shall be carried out using
phosphorous deoxidised copper pipes and shall include all necessary branch joints or headers as
required to provide for a complete system.
All pipework and fittings shall be insulated using 13mm closed cell insulation, unless otherwise
specified by the manufacturer.
Piping design shall be in such a way to ensure proper operation of the system, even with long
piping lengths. Sizing of pipes shall be carried out by the contractor following manufacturer’s
recommendations, bearing in mind the number of indoor units connected to the same outdoor
unit, the overall length of piping and the difference between the units including elevations.
All pipework shall be supported using suitable galvanised steel brackets with pipe insulation
blocks on galvanised steel channels.
Refrigerant pipework branching tees (refnet joints) shall be supplied by the AC manufacturer. No
other types of fittings shall be used unless these are approved by the same manufacturer. Once
complete, the installation shall be pressure tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
6.0
CLOSED CELL INSULATION
Thermal insulation and finishes shall be resistant against rotting, mould / fungus growth and
attack by vermin. It shall be finished in a smooth, clean and workmanlike manner, with all joints
tightly finished.
Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that air circulation between the pipe and insulation
shall be avoided and shall ideally be applied after the pipes have been pressure tested.
MTS Consulting Limited
32
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The insulation used shall have a closed cell structure having a very high resistance to water
vapour transmission. It shall have a surface spread of flame rating to Class 1 according to BS476
Part 7:1997, and a Fire performance according to British Building Regulations.
o
o
The material shall have an operating temperature range between -40 C and 105 C, a thermal
o
conductivity factor of 0.035W/mK at 10 C and a water vapour transmission resistance value of 
7,000.
Insulation around joints and fittings, especially on refnet joints shall be proprietary and preferably
supplied by the AC manufacturer.
Provisions for insulation blocks shall be included for each supporting bracket. These may only be
omitted where pipes are supported horizontally or on cable trays. Insulation ends shall be joint
using appropriate adhesive and insulation tape. No cable ties and electrical tapes will be allowed
to be used around the insulation. Signal and power cables between units shall be affix with
pipework using also insulation tape.
External installation shall be covered using polyisobutylene materials, strictly following
manufacturer’s installation methods. Other methods for protecting the installation externally, such
as galvanised steel covers, may also be acceptable subject to approval.
7.0
CONDENSATE DRAINS
All condensate drains pipework shall be carried out in solvent welded PVC pipes. The minimum
pipe diameter for one indoor unit shall be 25mm. All drains installed above soffit or left exposed
within internal spaces shall be covered with 9mm closed cell insulation. Drains from separate
units may be connected to each other via y-connections. Provision of rodding points shall be
included for every 6m run.
Pipework connecting more than three indoor units shall be sized at diameter 40mm. Change in
direction shall be made by means of easy bends. Condensate drain stacks shall be installed and
routed and connected to the nearest rain water stack at level -1. Cost of drain pipework should
include for any S-traps, fittings and connections as may be required.
8.0
DUCTWORK
The contractor shall be responsible to check the actual building dimensions, shape and other
relevant details before starting the fabrication of ductwork. Any duct off sets that may be required
to fit in the space available shall be deemed to have been included in the tendered price and no
additional payments shall be made in this respect.
All seams, joints and connections between the duct sections, and the connections to the
equipment shall be made in a manner to reduce air leakage to a minimum
Connections to the equipment shall be made with angle flanged joints and flexible canvas
connections. These shall not exceed 300mm in length and should not be used as bends.
Bends and offset shall have a minimum throat radius equal to the width of the duct at that section.
All supports, hangers, bolts, nuts, drop rods etc. shall be manufactured using AISI 304 (A2)
stainless steel materials.
The use of flexible ducts is not permitted unless related provisions and materials are approved by
the Engineer.
MTS Consulting Limited
33
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
8.1
C43284
Galvanised Ductwork
All duct work used for the car park ventilation systems shall be manufactured from hotdipped galvanised sheet steel. Construction of ductwork shall comply with HVCA
specification DW/144 or SMACNA, and shall be suitably braced to eliminate sagging.
The use of pop riveting ducts shall not be accepted.
8.2
Prefabricated Sandwich Panels
All duct work used for conditioned air systems shall be manufactured from rigid foamed
polyurethane resins about 20mm thick. The duct panels shall have embossed aluminium
foil on the external surface of the panel and smooth aluminium foil on the internal surface.
Aluminium foil thickness shall be 80μm.
Panels shall have a low participation in fire, and smokes shall have a reduced opacity
and toxicity. All panels shall be in conformity with the requirements of the international
regulations related to fire safety.
Sections cut from panels to construct the duct shall have edges cut at 45° and bonded
together using recommended adhesives. Internal corners of ductwork shall have a silicon
type sealer applied and aluminium foil tape shall be applied on all the external edges.
Edges of all the panels at all joints, transition pieces or connection to the air devices etc.
shall be reinforced using suitable metal profiles.
Joints between panels shall have a gasket between the metal profiles and another
interlocking profile to ensure the panels are held securely together. Panels held together
with adhesive and or tape only will not be accepted.
Duct stiffeners and supports shall be included as recommended by the panel
manufacturers. The manufacturer's recommended spacing of the supports required shall
be adhered to.
8.3
Ductwork Installed Outdoors
Prefabricated sandwich panels shall have a thickness of 30mm, with external aluminium
foil of 0.2mm thickness. The density of panels to be installed outdoors shall be 48 ±
3
2kg/m . All ducting installed outdoors shall be suitably protected with a waterproof resin
(gum skin type) to a thickness of 1.0mm which shall be applied evenly over the tape and
all flanges. No bitumen based compound must be used as weather protection.
9.0
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
Dampers shall be provided as shown on the drawings. On rectangular ducts these shall be of the
opposed multi-blade type having an air leakage not exceeding 5% of the design air flow when
fully closed. All dampers shall be fitted with a locking quadrant marked in the set position after
regulation and balancing. Most of the components shall be manufactured from galvanised steel.
MTS Consulting Limited
34
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
10.0
C43284
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
10.1
Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be of galvanised steel casing construction with stainless steel blades
and springs. These dampers shall be actuated by a resettable thermal link and shall
have internal mechanical state indicator. The dampers shall be certified for a minimum of
2 hours integrity and shall be complete with the appropriate installation frame.
10.2
Fire / Smoke Dampers
Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be provided wherever shown on the
drawings. The dampers shall be similar to those manufactured by 'Actionair Equipment
Ltd.' or equal and approved. The dampers shall maintain their integrity for a period of 2
hours. The damper blades shall be formed from stainless steel with bearings and flexible
gasketing also of stainless steel to provide positive fire and smoke control. No
degradable or synthetic material that will contribute to smoke loading shall be accepted
for gasketing purposes.
A replaceable external stainless steel gearbox with stainless steel gears operating in
conjunction with galvanised steel rotary discs shall eliminate accumulative backlash.
A galvanised steel outer frame and spigot connections together with a galvanised steel
inner frame shall combine to provide a slim line double skin dust proof casing of high
rigidity. The assembly, when installed in the air distribution system shall satisfy the air
leakage requirements of Classes A, B and C of HVCA Ductwork specifications DW 142
and 143.
Fire / Smoke dampers shall be connected to the fire alarm system interfaces provided by
others in the vicinity. Dampers shall actuated and fully close upon a signal from the fire
alarm panel. Dampers shall automatically reset when the alarm is cleared.
An external, replaceable electrical thermal release exposed to the air stream shall
provide the additional dual fail-safe operation of the damper mechanism in the event of
an in duct fire or abnormal rise in temperature.
The fire / smoke dampers shall be supplied to operate with triple fail safe operation, such
that apart from thermal or power interrupt operation (spring instant closure) fail safe
status is also ensured if the ETR is not fitted properly to the ductwork.
The fire / smoke damper shall be supplied from a fused connection unit through the
essential electrical supply distribution boards, allowed for in another section of these
specifications, in close proximity of the fire damper. Prices quoted for fire damper shall
allow for the electrical wiring between the fused connection unit and the damper itself.
11.0
AIR DEVICES
All air devices shall be of aluminium construction unless specified otherwise. Circular or opposed
blade dampers shall be included with those air devices which shall be installed on the supply and
return systems of, ventilation systems, or large fan coil units, which would have more than two air
devices connected to its ductwork.
MTS Consulting Limited
35
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
All plenum boxes on supply, return grilles and slot diffusers shall be acoustically insulated and
manufactured for minimum assembly heights to limit service space requirements.
All air devices shall be powder coated to colours as will be instructed later on. All dimensions
refer to neck dimensions.

Devices reference EG/x shall be of the egg-crate type and shall be used on extract air
systems.

Devices reference RG/x shall be of the fixed linear angled bladed return grille used on return
air systems. These shall include reusable cleanable filters which shall be easily accessible
from grille’s facia.

Devices reference SD4/x shall be four way supply air diffusers used on supply air ventilation /
air conditioning systems.

Devices reference SD3/x shall be three way blow square air diffusers similar to SD4.

Devices reference SD2C/x shall be two way blow, corner type, supply air diffusers which shall
discharged air in two directions at perpendicular directions (90⁰)

Devices reference SD2S/x shall be two way blow supply air diffusers which shall discharged
air in two opposite directions (180⁰)

Devices reference SD1/x shall be one way blow supply air diffusers discharging air towards
one direction.

Devices reference WL/x shall be weather louver complete with a set of blades fixed at 45°
and a rear mounted bird mesh. These grilles shall be complete with a weathering blade and
fixing sub-frame which would limit dust penetration in to the system as much as possible

Bird mesh (MG/x) used on duct termination of supply or exhaust systems (as shown on the
drawings) and shall consist of an expanded galvanised steel mesh

Devices reference NVTG/x shall be non-vision transfer grilles having a set of fixed front
horizontal blades at 45° complete with rear angle frame trim. These shall be used for air
transfer through walls / doors.

Devices reference SL/x shall be slot diffusers complete with air control blades adjustable from
the face of the diffuser. The diffusers shall be complete with an acoustically internally
insulated galvanised steel plenum box which shall include a perforated diffuser plate.
Volume control dampers shall be included on the connecting flexible ducting. Suffix N
denotes number of slots, whilst x denotes length of each diffuser section in mm.

Devices reference FB/x shall be fixed blades supply or return grilles having 12.5 mm pitch
and symmetrical profile.

Devices reference BD/x shall be pressure relief dampers. The dampers shall be constructed
from galvanised sheet steel and shall be complete with all flanges and fixing accessories.
They shall be factory set to open when the pressure on the inner side of the damper reaches
50 Pa and shall include a counter weight for final field adjustment.

Devices reference CD2/x shall adjustable curved blade supply air grille complete which shall
discharge air in two directions.
MTS Consulting Limited
36
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
12.0
C43284

Devices reference CD1/x shall adjustable curved blade supply air grille complete which shall
discharge air in one direction.

Devices reference DV/x shall be circular disc valves used for ventilation systems with small
quantities of air transfer.

Devices reference JD/x shall be jet diffusers used on supply air conditioning systems where
large throws are required.
VENTILATION FANS
12.1
CARPARK / ARCHIVES EXTRACT FANS
Fans shall be fire-rated, short-cased, axial flow type, manufactured from hot dipped
galvanised steel equipped with aluminium alloy blades. The fans shall be suitable for in
o
duct installation and capable to operate at a temperature of 300 C for 1 hour.
The fans shall be supplied complete with a controller / starter, all necessary mounting
hardware, fittings, supports, brackets, anti-vibration mountings and any other accessories
required for installation.
Fans shall be installed in such a manner as to enable their removal without disturbing the
ductwork, attenuators etc. The exhaust fans shall be supplied with a motor which has
sealed for life ball bearings. They shall be statically and dynamically balanced by the
manufacturer.
All extractor fans shall be inverter driven, operating at variable speeds. During normal
running, they shall operate continuously to provide 6 air changes per hour (ac/hr). In the
event of fire / smoke, extractor fans shall operate at full speed to provide the necessary
10 ac/hr. Such switching shall be activated via the fire/smoke alarm system. Fans shall
continue to operate at this speed until the alarm systems are reset manually. This shall
override any manual controllers even when fans are not in operation.
The fan motor shall be protected to IP55 and shall be suitable to operate on 400V / 3pH /
50Hz electrical power supply. Motors shall include internal overload protection. Electrical
connections to the terminal box shall be made using a metal flexible conduit. Price
quoted shall include for the electrical wiring between motor control centre (MCC) and fan,
and a suitable isolator in the vicinity of each fan.
The specified External Static Pressures are for tender purposes only. The contractor is to
ensure that the equipment selected shall be suitable to provide the air flows stipulated,
taking into account the pressure drops of acoustic louvers, attenuators etc.
Fans with smaller diameters and low noise breakout would be more favourable.
MTS Consulting Limited
37
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
12.2
C43284
TOILET EXTRACT FANS
Fans reference EF/T shall be centrifugal type, suitable for ‘in duct’ installation, as shown
on the drawings. The fans shall be supplied complete with all necessary mounting
hardware, fittings, supports brackets, anti vibration mountings and any other accessories
required. The fans shall also include any attenuators required to ensure that the system
break out noise is in accordance to the noise levels specified for each space.
Connections of the fans to the duct work shall be by means of suitable flexible canvas
connections. The entire assembly shall be installed to enable removal of the fan without
disturbing the duct work.
Fan motors shall be of the totally enclosed type protected to IP 54 and shall be suitable to
operate on an electrical supply voltage as specified in the fan schedule. The motors shall
include internal overload protection unless specified otherwise. Electrical connections
shall be to an external terminal box using flexible conduit..
Prices quoted for fans shall include for electrical wiring between their supply point
(provided for in another section of these specifications), the fan itself and any controllers
as necessary.
Note:
Contractor shall be responsible to check and modify the E.S.P. of the fans from those
specified in the tender schedules following any re-routing of duct runs that may take
place prior to the order of the fans.
13.0
FAN CONTROL PANEL (FCP)
The FCP panels shall be installed at level 4 as indicated in the drawings. The panel shall operate
via the electrical supply as shown on the relevant schedule and control the operation of the car
park and archives exhaust fans EF-C and EF-A. The panel shall include all the necessary
equipment, including MCBs, contactors / starters with overloads, start / stop push buttons, run /
trip indication, manual / off / auto switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, insulated transformer,
means of isolation, wiring etc to provide the facilities listed hereunder and in the MCC schedule.






Phase indicating lights
Lamp test facility
Lockable isolating handle
Phase failure unit
Emergency push button allowing manual shutdown of the complete panel
Control circuit with MCB, ‘ON’ lamp, insulated transformer, relays , etc for the control circuit
necessary
A local means of isolation shall be provided adjacent to each item of equipment. The rating of
this isolation shall all be the same and shall be to the highest of the exhaust fans connected.
MCCs rated in excess of 10kW TP&N are to include an electrical meter. This meter shall be
digital / electronic type and complete with a 5 digit LED or LCD screen display which shall be
installed on the panel’s facia. The meter shall operate at a nominal voltage of 400 Volts at 50
Hertz, and be the direct connection type or include current transformers.
The meter is to be to Class 2 precision (2% accuracy) according to IEC 61036, giving a reading
update every one second and suitable to operate at temperatures of at least 50 degree Celsius.
The availability of the energy consumption reading is to be retained and guaranteed, even upon
the interruption of the mains power supply.
MTS Consulting Limited
38
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
13.1
C43284
Operation
The MCC shall operate all exhaust fans at suitable speeds, providing adequate
ventilation in accordance with design guidelines and regulations as follows:
Car Park Exhaust Fan – EF-C
1. 6ac/hr during normal running
2. 10ac/hr in case of emergency, when fire smoke / heat detection system is
activated.
Archives Ventilation Fan – EF-A
1. 6ac/hr during normal running
2. Switched off in case of emergency, when fire smoke / heat detection system is
activated.
The MCC shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system. Car park fan is to keep running
at high speed until the fire alarm panel is reset manually. Normal operation of the fans
shall be automatically restored once the fault on fire alarm is cleared. Operational control
and monitoring shall be interfaced with the project Building Management System. For
further details, refer to the BMS section of these technical specifications.
14.0
CROSS TALK ATTENUATORS
Cross talk attenuators shall be installed on the ventilation system at level 0 as shown on the
drawings. These are required to eradicate the transmission of airborne ducted speech and noise
between meeting rooms.
Attenuators shall have a high acoustic performance and selected to correspond to the duct crosssection, installed in-line with the ductwork. Attenuation shall take place out of airstream thus
having minimal or negligible pressure drop.
Cross talk attenuators shall be manufactured from galvanised steel having lock-formed mastic
sealed joints. These shall be unpadded straight through with controlled density mineral wool infill
with tissue facing to reduce fibre egress. Internal liners shall be faced with perforated sheet steel.
15.0
Crosstalk path
Room NR
Received speech level
minus lowest NR
Approx. Length of
Attenuator
Meeting room to
Meeting room
30 to 30
63 - 30 = 33
1250mm
NOISE GENERATION
Noise levels of the ventilation equipment shall be such that they satisfy the requirements listed
below. Any further attenuation required, over and above the provisions included in this tender are
to be taken into account by the Tenderer in order to ensure adherence with the above. In
addition, any vibration transmission from the equipment to the building must be eliminated by
means of appropriate mountings. Variations associated with such supplementary attenuation
provisions shall not be accepted.
MTS Consulting Limited
39
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Space / Room Type
Noise Rating
Open Plan Offices
35
Public Utilities
40
Corridors
40
Waiting Room / Lobbies
35
Conference Halls
30
Offices (Executive)
30
Offices (Other)
35
Kitchen / Lounge
35
The above assumes that the spaces’ background noise levels are insignificant.
16.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
During the execution of the works the contractor shall be responsible to carry out all necessary
cleaning, pressure testing and any other procedures required to ensure soundness of the
installation. These tests are to be supported by detailed test certificates and any other related or
necessary documentation to permit identification, location, method and results obtained following
such tests.
Completed certificates and documentation are to be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer within
two weeks from completion of such tests and shall be signed by an independent warranted
Engineer whose contact details shall be included in the covering letter of the documentation.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing three working days before he intends to carry
out any tests to enable the Engineer to be present if necessary. The Engineer shall have the right
to alter the date of the tests if he feels there is sufficient reason to do so.
On completion of works, all necessary testing, balancing and adjustments, shall be carried out by
the Contractor. Any deficiencies identified shall be reported to the Engineer as early as possible
so that these could be rectified prior to handing over.
MTS Consulting Limited
40
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION V - PLUMBING SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The scope of the M&E contractor is to supply, install, test and commission all the water systems
required for the project strictly in accordance with these specifications.
The mains water supply to the project shall be supplied from the existing government mains. A
supply pipe shall be connected to the current OD63mm pipe located in the existing pump room.
This pipework shall be routed from the tunnel and to fill up the new water storage tanks required
for the extension. A water sub-meter connected to the BMS shall be installed for monitoring
purposes. Tank water shall then feed all necessary sanitary fixtures and other points as required.
All infrastructural pipework shall be carried out using polypropylene as indicated on the drawings.
Provisions for pressure boosting equipment shall be included as detailed in these specifications.
Waste pipework shall also be included. This shall be carried out using UPVC materials.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All pipework shall be blanked off during the course of the installation to prevent any ingress of dirt
or other material, which may otherwise block the pipe-work. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible to comply with this provision under all circumstances.
Tube ends shall be cut square and all burrs removed prior to cleaning ends for jointing in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Connections to equipment shall be flanged if
these exceed Φ63mm/Φ2” diameters.
Where any of the services referred to below comprise more than one type of tube or pipe and
conversions are necessary in the connection, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and
installing the necessary adapters. Transitions from one material to the other shall be made using
appropriate fittings / jointing methods as recommended by the pipe and fittings manufacturers.
External pipework shall be covered with two coats of UV protective paint or equal and approved
materials.
3.0
PLUMBING PIPEWORK
3.1
Polypropylene Pipework
PPR pipes shall be rated at 10 bar SDR 11, suitable for potable water applications. Such
pipe-work shall be surface installed in shafts, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Installation procedures, including jointing methods and support intervals, shall strictly
follow manufacturer’s recommendations.
Whenever PPR pipes are visible (e.g. in shafts and risers) visual aesthetics must be
considered in addition to the construction requirements. All supports shall be
manufactured from hot-dipped galvanized steel which shall be supplied by a reputable
manufacturer.
MTS Consulting Limited
41
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Pipework exposed to direct UV shall include a protective barrier, supplied by the
pipework manufacturer.
3.2
UPVC Pipework
This pipework shall be installed between the Transfer pumps / submersible pump and the
draining point to which such pipework shall be routed. Material shall be rated at 10bar
working pressure and joined using solvent weldings procedures.
Tubes and pipes shall be manufactured from rigid Unplasticised Poly Vinyl Chloride
(UPVC) PN10. The material from which the pipes are formed shall comply with the
following requirements:
o
2
The tensile strength at 20 C shall not be less than 34,500 KN/m ;
o
The softening point shall be not less than 150 C.
Pipes shall be supplied in straight lengths having internal and external surfaces clean,
smooth and free from grooving; the end shall be cleanly square cut and be protected
from damage during transit. The minimum wall thickness shall be suitable for a long term
o
maximum working pressure of 10 bar at 20 C. Each pipe shall be marked in accordance
with B.S.
Care shall be taken to avoid notching the pipework. Protection shall be given against
high sun temperatures during storage and erection.
4.0
WASTE WATER SYSTEM
4.1
Waste Pipework
All main drain water pipework shall be provided by others. The M&E contractor will be
responsible for connecting the waste pipework to drain pipework already installed,
allowing for the supply and installation of necessary fittings/adapters for a complete
commissioned system.
Waste pipes shall be solvent welded PVC. These jointing procedures shall strictly follow
manufacturer’s instructions, using necessary fittings supplied by the manufacturer.
Jointing methods using heating procedures shall not be accepted.
Horizontal buried pipes must be protected using sand cement haunching and installed with
adequate gradient. Easy bends are to be used for changes in direction. Rodding tees are to
be installed in shaft and as necessary, to enable cleaning of blockages by the use of
‘flexible’ wiring. It is important to ensure that all these would be easily accessible.
MTS Consulting Limited
42
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Waste pipe sizes shall be as per following table:
4.2
Sanitary fitting
Waste pipe size
Shower
50mm
Kitchen Sink
50mm
Wash hand basin
40mm
Water Closet
110mm
Bath
50mm
Urinal
32mm
Sanitary Ware
All sanitary ware, including chrome-ware, angle valves flexible connectors, traps, etc. are to
be provided by the Client. The M&E contractor is to include for the following:i. Installation only of sanitary ware, traps and connection to drains
ii. Installation of all flexible connectors, chrome ware and angle valves, mixers, towel
rails, soap holders etc.
All items must be neatly installed strictly following architects / interior designer
instructions. The systems must include anti-mould ‘silicone’ on all boundaries to avoid
water penetration. They shall be mounted on appropriate bases using cement and sand
mortar where applicable. Cost for all the above, allowing also for material and labour,
must be included in the quoted rates. Installation methods are to be discussed with the
Engineer prior to execution.
5.0
VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
5.1
Isolating Valves
All isolating valves shall be of the ball-o-top type unless otherwise indicated. The valve
shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as that of the pipe-work onto which it is
installed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5.2
Ball Float Valves
Ball float valves are to be manufactured from bronze / brass materials, sourced from a
reputable manufacturer and of high quality to ensure proper functioning for long periods.
MTS Consulting Limited
43
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
5.3
5.4
C43284
Bib-taps

Dezincification resistant copper alloy

Hard chrome plated solid ball

Full bore

PTFE seats and stem seals

WRC approved

Lockable type (for external use only) and complete with screwed-in stainless
steel hose connector
Strainers
Strainers shall be of the single type and suitable for potable water having screwed
connections. The bodies shall be in brass / bronze having stainless steel baskets. The
free area of the cage shall be at least five times the cross-sectional area of the pipe and
shall be installed in such a manner to facilitate access.
6.0
DRAIN COCKS
All sections of the service main shall be provided and fitted with 20mm emptying cocks with hose
connection at the lowest point of the run. This provision is to be quoted for with the pipework BOQ
rates. Drain cocks shall also be provided after each non-return valve to enable easy check for
correct operation of non-return valves.
7.0
AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
Pipes shall be graded to facilitate venting. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all high points
and sections in the pipework where they are intended to vent. The cost of these AAVs shall be
included in the cost of the pipework.
Automatic air vents, unless otherwise noted, shall have gunmetal bodies of not less than 15mm
screwed connection, copper or stainless steel floats and guides and non-corrodible ball needle
valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a lock shield valve. Air release
pipes shall be run to discharge at the nearest suitable points.
8.0
WATER METER
The required water meter on the mains water plumbing pipework shall be brass-bodied, suitable for
potable water applications, Class D, with pulse output for BMS interfacing. This shall include an
inbuilt water strainer and complete with the necessary couplings.
Operational monitoring shall be interfaced with the project Building Management System. For
further details, refer to the BMS section of these technical specifications.
MTS Consulting Limited
44
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
9.0
C43284
WATER STORAGE TANKS
Water storage tanks (2 x 2000ltrs) shall be provided for first class water storage suitable for
potable applications UV stabilised. These shall be made of high density polyethylene, be suitably
reinforced and guaranteed accordingly. They shall be cylindrical (vertical) in shape and complete
with a lid. Each tank shall have an effective capacity of 2000 litres.
The ball float valve installed in the domestic cold water tank supply shall be ½”, with a Nylon /
Teflon insert and an adequately sized ball float. A quarter turn valve shall be included for isolation
purposes. The valve shall be preceded by a union joint for ease of isolation and maintenance.
The tenderer is to verify that these tanks will fit in the allocated space prior to ordering and shall
assume that the necessary plinths shall be provided.
10.0
2ND CLASS WATER RESERVOIR
The second class water reservoir shall be located at level -04 for rain water collection. Water from
nd
this reservoir shall be used to the 2 class water and the fire fighting pumps.
To ensure that water supply is always available, provision shall be made for bowser fill-up.
The bowser fill-up shall consist of a dry PPR pipework, OD 110. The pipe shall run from the fill up
point at ground level to the reservoir. The fill up point at ground level shall contain an inlet breech
to which the bowser shall connect. This shall be housed next to the fire-fighting’s inlet breeching
point in a dedicated enclosure, labelled ‘Bowser fill-up point’. The entry point to the reservoir shall
be via a dispersion plate to ensure even distribution of water supply in the reservoir.
11.0
ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS
Power supply points for water heaters shall be provided by others in the vicinity of the unit. The
heaters shall have capacities as indicated in the drawings/BOQ. They shall be complete with
mounting bracket, heating element, anode, thermostat, thermometer, indicator lamp, non return /
pressure relief, and all necessary angle valves, chrome connectors, flexible tubing and fittings.
Internal cylinders shall be ceramic-lined and guaranteed for at least 3 years at a working pressure
of around 8bar. Two spare sacrificial anodes shall be free issued to the operator at no additional
cost.
Installation shall include for power wiring from heater to double pole switch in the vicinity, a waste
pipe in UPVC diameter 25mm from heater to waste water system and a flexible hose from the
relief port to the diameter 25mm waste pipe.
12.0
DCW / SCW BOOSTER SETS
The pump booster set for both first class and second class system shall comprise of 2 in number
(respectively) identical pumps, inverter driven (one for each pump installed inside control panel),
operating in cascade mode. These shall be of the Vertical/horizontal, multi-stage centrifugal
configuration, system to include non-return and isolating valves manufactured from nickel-plated
brass. DCW system shall be suitable for drinking water applications. Pump shall be protected
against dry running by an interlocked hard wired switch.
MTS Consulting Limited
45
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The packaged booster pump set shall be fully assembled by the pump manufacturer on to a
stainless steel base frame. The set shall also comprise stainless steel AISI304 suction and
discharge headers, pressure vessels (as recommended by manufacturer), gauges, strainer,
flexible connections and pump management unit controlling the operation of the pumps. Shaft
impeller and body shall also be manufactured in stainless steel.
The system shall maintain the pressure constant while the flow varies according to demand. The
booster set shall also include the pressure reducing valves required to lower the pressure of the
water supply in the lower pressure zones. To allow for a safe and optimal operation, the
necessary connections shall be supplied, including air relief valves and pressure switches.
Interfacing points for the remote operation and monitoring through BMS shall also be provided. In
view of this, the contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS
installer/programmer prior to ordering. Pump’s operation shall also be interfaced with the Extra
Low Level switches installed in the reservoir/tanks.
12.1
Strainers
Strainers shall be of the single type and suitable for potable water. Connections shall be
screwed BSP thread. The bodies of single strainers shall be of gunmetal or bronze.
Straining cages shall be of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel. The free area of the
cage shall be at least five times the cross-sectional area of the pipe. Cages shall be
easily cleanable.
12.2
Pump
The performance of the pumps shall be determined by test procedures in accordance
with B.S. or ISO, or equivalent standards. When so directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide a manufacturer’s certificate of such tests.
The pump casing design pressure is to withstand 1 1/2 working pressure. The motor is to
be non-overloading over the entire performance range. Pumps shall be selected to
operate near their peak efficiency point.
Impeller diameter shall be no greater than 85% of the maximum site impeller that can fit
in the casing. Statically and dynamically balanced impellers.
The systems shall be installed on frames/plinths and must include suitable kinetic
mountings/isolators.
12.3
Pump Performance
a) DCW hydraulic performance – 1.2litres/s at 60m head
b) SCW hydraulic performance – 0.8litres/s at 60m head
MTS Consulting Limited
46
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
13.0
C43284
TRANSFER PUMP SET
The transfer pump set shall be used to pump water from reservoir to street level when water level
in the reservoir is high. The set shall consist of two fixed speed identical pumps, operating in duty
– assist mode. The transfer pump set shall operate with two dedicated float switches. The first
float switch (High Water Level) shall activate one of the pumps. The second float switch (Extra
High Water Level) shall put the second pump in operation in the event that the water level in the
reservoir continues to rise.
Pumps shall be horizontal, multi-stage, centrifugal, with most of its components manufactured
from stainless steel AISI 316. The pump set shall be fully assembled by the pump manufacturer
on to a stainless steel base frame. The set shall also comprise stainless steel AISI304 suction
and discharge headers, pressure gauges, strainer, flexible connections and pump management
unit controlling the operation of the pumps. Shaft impeller and body shall also be manufactured
in stainless steel.
Installation shall include for power wiring from pump to supply isolator in the vicinity which shall
be enclosed in a galvanised steel flexible metal conduit.
Each pump shall have a duty of 15 l/s at 40m Head.
Interfacing points for the remote operation and monitoring through BMS shall also be provided. In
view of this, the contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS
installer/programmer prior to ordering.
14.0
SUMP PUMP
A submersible pump shall be installed in the sump located at level -4 pump room. This shall be
constructed mostly using plastic parts with norel or equal and approved impellers.
The pump assembly shall include an integrated quality float switch which shall be supplied and
assembled by the pump manufacturer.
Pump characteristics shall satisfy the following duties:
0.5l/s at 40m Head
Pump motor shall operate on a 230V/1ph/50Hz supply and its rating shall not exceed 0.5kW.
Installation shall include for power wiring from pump to supply isolator in the vicinity.
Interfacing points for the remote operation and monitoring through BMS shall also be provided. In
view of this, the contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS
installer/programmer prior to ordering.
15.0
WATER LEVEL CONTROL PANEL
The water capacity of the fire fighting and second class water reservoir shall be measured and
constantly monitored. This shall be by means of a number of float switches installed at specific
height in the water reservoir. The data collected from these switches shall be reflected on the
water level control panel by means of indication led lamps.
The panel shall be installed within the pump room at level -3. It shall be constructed from glass
reinforced plastic (GRP) or a heavy gauge epoxy coated sheet steel having with an ingress
protection rated at IP55.
MTS Consulting Limited
47
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
The panel shall have a visual indication for all the water levels namely:







‘Extra-High Water Level’
‘High Water Level’
‘Medium-High Water Level’
‘Medium-High Water Level’
‘Medium-Low Water Level’
‘Low Water Level’
‘Extra-Low Water Level’
The price quoted for the control panel shall include for the control panel itself, all the necessary
relays, transformers, control wiring and conduit in galvanized steel between the float switches and
control panel, together with power supply wiring and connecting up in pump room / level -1
distribution board (provided by others).
Additionally the panel shall have an output for the remote monitoring through BMS. In view of this,
the contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS installer/programmer prior to
ordering.
16.0
IDENTIFICATION LABELS AND MARKINGS
These shall be supplied and installed on all equipment, exposed main piping inside the pump
room and in shafts. These shall clearly indicate equipment reference, pipe use, flow direction etc.
17.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
During the execution of the works the contractor shall be responsible to carry out all necessary
cleaning, flushing and pressure testing and any other procedures required to ensure soundness
of the installation. These tests are to be supported by detailed test certificates and any other
related or necessary documentation to permit identification, location, method and results obtained
following such tests.
Completed certificates and documentation are to be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer within
two weeks from completion of such tests and shall be signed by an independent warranted
Engineer whose contact details shall be included in the covering letter of the documentation.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing three working days before he intends to carry
out any tests to enable the Engineer to be present if necessary. The Engineer shall have the right
to alter the date of the tests if he feels there is sufficient reason to do so.
Under no circumstances shall piping be buried before tests have been carried out to the
satisfaction of the contractor’s Commissioning Certification Engineer.
MTS Consulting Limited
48
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION VI – VOICE & DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE OF WORKS
A structured telephone, data and CCTV network is to be prepared between all points indicated on
the drawing. This will include for the backbone infrastructure between the main data rooms in the
existing building and the various patch panel cabinets on each floor in the new building via fibre
optic cabling. This project shall also cover the installation of single or dual outlet sockets, cable
from the outlet points to the patching cabinet, cabinet, patch panels, the termination of cables at
both ends, testing and certification of all links. All cabling related to the security systems shall be
in separate containment. In general data cabling shall be via galvanised cable trays whereas
security systems shall use galvanised cable trunking. Only 25mm diameter conduits pvc heavy
gauge or galvanized steel shall be used for the last part of the cable runs.
UTP four pair CAT 6 LSZH cable shall be used throughout for the voice and data network as well
as the CCTV distribution. OM3 Multimode 50/125µm 8 count (4 pair) LSZH Fibre Optic Cable
shall be used for connections between local cabinets. Connection to the main building shall be by
means of Multimode 50/125µm 12 count (6 pair) LSZH armoured Fibre Optic Cable
Active components do not form part of this tender.
2.0
SYSTEM DESIGN
Un-screened Twisted Pair (UTP) data cable, four pair, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH or LS0Z)
to Category 6 specification shall be used throughout the installation to join each outlet shown on
the drawings directly to the patch panel cabinet on the respective floor. Basement levels shall be
connected to the patch panel cabinet located at ground floor. Every single patch panel cabinet
(every floor) shall have a direct connection to the two computer rooms in the existing building via
independent and redundant routes.
3.0
CABINETS
The voice / data / CCTV cabinets shall be 42‘U’ high, grey in colour and installed two on every
level from ground floor upwards as shown on the drawings. Cabinets shall be 800mm wide and
800mm deep, having solid removable and reversible side panels, with bottom cable entry and a
vented top panel. Both the front and rear doors shall be designed with lift-off hinges allowing for
quick and easy detachment without the use of tools.
The cabinets shall be complete with vertical cable management hardware on both sides as well
as 1‘U’ high panels for horizontal management of patch cables, installed so that patch cables do
not cross in front of other patch panels. Each cabinet shall be supplied with 3 fixed shelves able
to support 100kg of non rack-mount equipment and one box/packet of 50 M6 cage bolts, nuts and
washers. Vertical management, shelving as well as the nuts and bolts shall be included in the
price of the cabinet itself.
MTS Consulting Limited
49
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
4.0
C43284
PATCH PANELS
All patch panels are to be of the Category 6 (CAT6) standard as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10.
These patch panels allow CAT6 components to reliably operate at frequencies of 250MHz. All
patch panels should have a port density of 24 ports in a 1U of rack enclosure space of a
maximum of 48 ports in 2U of rack enclosure space. Patch panels with a height greater that 2U
will not be considered. The following items are required on the patch panels:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.0
Labelling Area
Black Powder Coated Finish
Fits all standard 19” Racks
Pre-Numbered Ports
Backward compatible with Cat5e
Rear 110-type IDC termination blocks
Colour coded labelling inserts for T-568-A and T-568-B wiring
TERMINATIONS
Modular RJ45 eight way sockets to CAT6 shall be used for all terminations at all outlet points
shown in the drawings. These can be single or dual sockets as required and as indicated on the
drawings.
Note that for external cameras the RJ45 socket shall be installed within the premises as close as
possible to the camera location.
Monitor points are to include a single RJ45 socket outlet terminated direct from the patch panel
as other standard points as well as an empty 50mm pvc conduit between the respective floor box
/ power post and the monitor point itself. A fish wire shall also be left inside the empty 50mm
conduit. The termination on the wall shall be in two adjacent 75x75mm pvc back boxes. The
above is all to be included into the price of the monitor point as indicated in the relevant Bills of
Quantities.
There shall also be a two Cat 6 UTP cables between the floor box / power post and the monitor
position. These shall be terminated in a dual RJ45 Cat 6 socket outlets at the both ends. In terms
of costs, the socket outlets as well as the cabling have been added to the rest of the socket
outlets and added as standard points.
6.0
WI-FI SYSTEM
Preparation for a wireless local area network (WI-FI) system shall be installed in all levels as
indicated on the drawings. Access Points (AP’s) shall be installed by third party.
The infrastructure shall be mechanically protected by means of 25mm PVC conduit and the
routers shall be located as indicated.
The contractor shall allow enough extra cabling such that re-positioning of the socket outlet is
possible. Such positioning will ensure full coverage throughout.
MTS Consulting Limited
50
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
7.0
C43284
FIBRE OPTIC LINKS
Two redundant fibre optic links per floor are required, one to each computer room in the existing
building. The distances indicated in the bills refer to BOTH redundant routes on every floor. The
route of the cables shall be mainly on cable trays through shafts and the car park levels.
Each link shall consist of one 12 count (6 pair) multimode armoured fibre optic cable. Each fibre is
to support the OM3 transmission standard (ISO 11801) and have a core/cladding diameter of
50/125 µm. It is to be "laser optimized" such that it can support 10Gb Ethernet at 300m. The fibre
cable shall be armour distribution type with an aluminium armour for mechanical protection from
cutting or crushing and rodent resistant. Cable has to have a thermoplastic plenium and buffer
tube. The cable should also have a central strength member made of E-glass and a strength
member of Aramid yarn. The cable should be able to operate from -20 to 70 degrees Celsius and
withstand impact / crush load of 2000N/cm as per EIA-455-41 and EIA-455-25 standards. Jacket
colour of the cable should be Aqua.
The fibre optic cable strands shall be terminated (fusion-spliced and tested) in a 1U, 19” rack
format LC terminated splice tray box. The tray is to have proper internal cable management. The
supplier is to ensure that there is ample fibre optic length as spare.
The ground floor cabinets shall also be connected individually to all other floors via fibre optic
cable. This cable shall be similar to the one above however shall be 8 count (4 pair) and nonarmoured.
Power dB testing and OTDR testing must be carried out and the test results are to be issued in
the testing reports and submitted to the CBOM on completion of the project.
Patch leads shall be LC-LC 50/125µm.
Fibre Optic Layout
MTS Consulting Limited
51
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
8.0
C43284
CAT 6 CABLE INSTALLATION
Individual cable runs must be continuous, with no connectors or splices and must not exceed 90
meters in length from the patch panel to the socket.
All cables installed shall be identified at both ends using a permanent, proprietary cable marking
system. Marking on tape shall not be acceptable.
Note: Cables shall be considered as installed only when permanent marking has been
applied.
Termination of the cable to the RJ45 sockets and the patch panels requires special skills in order
to maintain CAT6 specification. A technician capable in this field shall be employed for this part of
the work.
Particular attention must be given to the cable manufacturer’s installation instructions. In
particular, care must be taken:
 To avoid a pulling tension in excess of 110N (25lbf - 37Kgm)
 To avoid bend radii smaller than 4 times the cable diameter
 To avoid twisting during pulling or installation
 To avoid tightly clinched cable ties which deform the cables
Note: Disregarding these basic precautions will almost certainly cause the cables to fail
the CAT 6 test. Failed cables shall then have to be replaced at no extra cost.
Particular attention must be given when installing the vertical risers. Standard Nylon ties tight
enough to hold the cable from falling will almost certainly deform and damage the cable.
Adequate precaution against this needs to be taken either by using special Velcro ties or other
similar methods which spread the force required over a wider area.
Parallel runs of data and power cables shall be installed with a minimum separation of
200mm.
9.0
CABLE MEASUREMENT
Please note that cables shall not be physically measured. For payment purposes, the total
of the lengths indicated by the test instrument shall prevail. Allowance for end cuts and
wastage must therefore be included in the rate quoted.
MTS Consulting Limited
52
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION VII – BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
DESCRIPTION
The system shall provide background music solely in the main reception area, and shall not be
considered as a Voice Evacuation System.
2.0
LOUDSPEAKERS
Flush ceiling mounted types are to be used in the reception area. 6W to 8W loudspeaker units
shall be evenly distributed in the ceiling of the main reception hall.
3.0
BACKGROUND MUSIC
Background music shall be provided by a multiple DVD player, capable of handling audio CD
music as well as having a minimum of two USB 2.0 or 3.0 inputs for playback of mp3 music.
MTS Consulting Limited
53
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION VIII – ELV CONTAINMENT
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
DESCRIPTION
Galvanised cable tray shall be used throughout the installation. This pathway shall be used for all
ELV services, including telephone and data wiring. CCTV and intruder alarm wiring shall utilize a
separate galvanised metal trunking as shown on the drawings. Fire detection and alarm cable
shall also be kept separate, either clipped directly to the structure or in separate 25mm PVC
conduits, particularly where cables are to be chased.
When planning the layout of cables on cable trays, attention should be given so that cables of
different systems are spaced as far as possible. All bunches of cable are to have identification
tags.
2.0
CABLE TRAY
Perforated cable tray shall be formed from plain steel sheet complying with BS1449 Part 1B,
Classification CR4/GP.
Cable tray shall have the dimensions and finish specified in the table below.
Note: Cable trays installed on roof and in the mechanical shaft shall be covered with an adequate
galvanised lid after installation of cables. Cables exposed to external elements will lead to
cracking and future failure.
2.1
Bends
Bends shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the cable tray and shall have
an inner radius of 50 mm and a straight length of 100 mm at each end.
No perforations shall be made in the circular portion of 100 mm and 150 mm bends. On
225 mm and 300 mm bends, perforations shall be made only along a line set 45 Deg. On
450 mm and 600 mm bends, perforations shall be made along lines set 30 Deg and 60
Deg.
2.2
Tees
Tees shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the cable tray. The distance
measured between a point of intersection and the end of the fittings shall be 100 mm.
2.3
Fixing Screws
Mushroom-head steel roofing bolts and nuts complying to BS1494 Part 1 shall be used to
fix together adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
MTS Consulting Limited
54
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
2.4
C43284
Cable Tray Accessories & Fixing
Cable tray shall only be cut along a line of plain metal, i.e. not through the perforations.
All cut edges of galvanised cable tray shall be prepared and treated with zinc rich paint.
Site fabrication of accessories shall not be accepted, unless authorised in writing by
the Project Office. Where special sections are required the material, thickness and finish
shall be as specified for standard items.
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
A minimum clear space of 20 mm shall be left behind all cable tray.
Fixing of cable tray shall be disposed at regular intervals not exceeding 1.2 m and at 225
mm from bends and intersections.
Fixing shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar complying to BS4360. When used with
galvanised trays, fixing shall be hot-dip galvanised after manufacture and bending or/and
drilling. Hot dipped galvanising shall comply with BS729 Part 1.
2.5
Dimensions & Finish of Cable Tray
Nominal
Minimum Height
Nominal Thickness
Finish
100 mm (4 in)
50 mm
1.0 mm
Zinc Chromate
150 mm (6 in)
50 mm
1.0 mm
Paint or
225 mm (9 in)
50 mm
1.5 mm
Hot Dipped
300 mm (12 in)
50 mm
1.5 mm
Galvanised to
450 mm (18 in)
50 mm
1.5 mm
BS729 Part 1
Width
2.6
Earthing
The cable tray shall be effectively earthed using 35mm earth cable. All sections of tray shall
be bonded together by proprietary bolts and nuts or by lugged 6mm cables.
MTS Consulting Limited
55
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
3.0
C43284
WIRE BASKET
Wire basket shall be run neatly on the surface of the building and truly vertical, horizontal or
parallel with the features of the building.
Manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used. Only where these are inadequate to meet special
local situations will fittings be fabricated.
If and where special fittings or sections of trunking are fabricated on site, they shall be prepared
and finished to the same standard as manufacturers' standard items.
Individual pieces of wire basket shall be independently supported. On straight runs fixing shall be
at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5 m and fixing screws, couplings and earth continuity
assemblies, shall all be of zinc plated steel (Electro-galvanised) complying with BS1706, Class B
coatings.
4.0
CABLE TRUNKING
Trunking shall be run neatly on the surface of the building and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel
with the features of the building.
Trunking runs shall be determined by the Contractor and co-ordinated with other services before
any work commences. Trunking shall be run at least 150 mm clear of plumbing and mechanical
services and 200mm clear of electrical services.
Manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used. Only where these are inadequate to meet special
local situations will fittings be fabricated.
Where special fittings or sections of trunking are fabricated - on site, they shall be prepared and
finished to the same standard as manufacturers' standard items.
Connections between trunking and conduit shall be by a screwed coupler and bush, or a standard
flange coupling or an adapter neck, fabricated or cast. Direct attachment of trunking to apparatus
will only be permitted if cable entries are provided with smooth bore bushes or grommets and the
return edge of the lid of the trunking is left intact.
Holes in trunking shall be drilled punched or cut by ring saw.
Individual pieces of trunking shall be independently supported. On straight runs fixing shall be at
regular intervals not exceeding 1.8 m and fixing screws shall be of zinc plated
(electro-galvanised) complying with BS1706, Class B coatings.
The wiring capacity of trunking shall be such as will permit easy drawing in without damage of the
cables, and shall be such that a space of factor of 25% is not exceeded.
MTS Consulting Limited
56
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
5.0
C43284
DADO TRUNKING
PVC Dado trunking shall be installed surface, parallel with the Dado trunking used for the
electrical power and 300mm above it. (In some locations it might not be possible to keep this
distance. In this case the maximum distance shall be maintained.)
Dado trunking shall be 100mm wide x 50mm deep. A vertical section of the same trunking shall
be used to connect the horizontal section to the wire tray above the soffit. RJ45 data sockets shall
be installed in the Dado trunking where this is available.
Standard fittings, Tees, bends and end-pieces shall be used to produce a neat, professional
installation.
MTS Consulting Limited
57
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION IX - LIGHTNING PROTECTION & EARTHING
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
GENERAL
The scope of this system is to ensure adequate lightning protection to the building, its occupants
and equipment within the building. This part shall cover the installation of earth rods,
reinforcement connections and clamps as well as the air terminal mesh at roof level. The design
shall be compliant to the latest MSA EN 62305.
Furthermore, earthing protection shall be required in all data / communications rooms from
electromagnetic frequencies that can be propagated from the adjacent passenger lift. This
shielding shall therefore only be applied on the wall which is back to back to this passenger lift on
all floors above ground.
2.0
DESIGN CRITERIA
The Lightning Protections System shall consist of air terminations, horizontal conductors, vertical
conductors and the earth electrode network. Air terminations should be of the Faraday cage type.
All workmanship and materials shall comply with the recommendations of MSA EN 62305. All
components of the lightning protection system shall be standard products of a reputable supplier
and shall be protected against corrosion and erosion in line with standard practice.
The copper tape at roof level shall be installed above screed level. The contractor is also required
to liaise with the building contractor such that the required clamps and tape are installed before
the concrete is laid.
PVC coated copper conductors shall be used as the down conductor system. All earth electrodes
at basement level shall be interconnected.
3.0
EARTH RODS
The total earth resistance of all earth terminals shall not exceed five (5) Ohms. Additional earth
pits/rods shall be installed where necessary to meet the impedance criteria. Each earth rod must
be a minimum of four (4) metres in length. Earth rods shall be properly packed with a conductive
clay compound and shall be installed with a lightweight inspection pit to enable future
maintenance access.
Should earth rods be unpractical in a given location, then earth mats or strips can be used with
the approval of the engineer. A dimensioned drawing showing the proposed installation of such
mats or strips in relation to the part of the building concerned needs to be presented for approval.
Rod electrodes will consist of extendible molecularly bonded, steel cored, copper clad rods. The
lightning protection system shall also be connected to the main earth bar of the earthing and
bonding system of the building. Where the relevant standards permit, this link should incorporate
an isolating link at the earth bar for test purposes.
The maximum overall earth impedance for any type of installation should not exceed five (5)
Ohms.
MTS Consulting Limited
58
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Should earth electrodes beneath the building pierce the waterproof tanking, precautions should
be taken to eliminate the possibility of ground water infiltration. Reference is made to a suggested
method of sealing shown in MSA EN 62305. This or a similar arrangement approved by the
Architect must be applied.
Note:
4.0
Liaison with other trades such as the building contractor in order to achieve continuity
throughout the building is the responsibility of the Lightning Protection Contractor.
EARTH IMPEDANCE TESTS
The contractor shall, after completion of the installation, perform resistance tests on all earthing
points in the presence of the Engineer.
The measurements shall be recorded and included in the test certificate. A copy of the test
certificates shall be presented to the engineer.
The reinforcement bars or steel columns are required to be electrically continuous from top to
bottom. The contractor is therefore requested to perform an electrical continuity test to ascertain
appropriate bonding. Bonding shall be through conventional methods.
5.0
AIR TERMINAL
Bare solid 8mm circular stainless steel conductor installed with appropriate stainless steel clips
shall be used in the pattern shown on the drawing. All metal equipment on the roofs, if applicable,
shall be bonded to the lightning protection system.
All components of the lightning protection system shall be standard products of a reputable
supplier and shall be protected against corrosion and erosion in line with standard practice.
6.0
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS EARTH
A separate earth electrode shall be installed specifically for ELV systems earthing. Earth
impedance of this terminal shall be less than One (1) Ohm. The electrode shall be located as
close as possible to the footprint of the comms rooms above but in sufficient distance from the
other earth electrodes (basement level).
Should the earth test result as greater than one ohm than additional earth points shall be installed
and connected together to create an earthing arrangement similar to that implemented in the
lightning protection design. In this case the clean earth system shall not be connected directly to
the lightning protection earthing network. Copper tape shall connect the ELV shaft to the clean
earth rod and terminated in a clean earth terminal in the comms room at ground floor level. A 200
x 25 x 6mm hard drawn copper earth busbar mounted on insulated supports is required in this
room. The tape shall be adequately terminated at the shaft end to eliminate as far as possible
accidental damage during installation of cable trays and other equipment.
All earthing systems must however be bonded as per BS 7671:2008.
MTS Consulting Limited
59
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
7.0
C43284
BONDING
All large metal objects on the roof or terraces of the protected building as well as all building
fabric parts, such as antennas, railing and air-conditioning equipment shall be bonded to the
lightning protection system. Attention must be given during bonding to other materials so that
erosion due to electrolysis is kept to a minimum.
Bridging across any anti vibration mountings shall either utilise flexible braid or flexible cable that
is installed with a loop at least three times the length of the gap between fixed and moveable
points.
8.0
EARTHING MESH
All five communication rooms shall be protected against EMF emission from the passenger lift.
An earthing mesh shall be installed to cover the whole wall abutting on the passenger lift. There
are various materials or fabrics that can be used for this purpose, including copper, aluminium
and others. The proposed material is to have a conductivity of less than 2.5Ohms/sqrm. This
mesh or fabric shall be properly terminated at ceiling and floor levels with a fixed connection to
the closest electrical earth. Should this mesh / fabric be made up of more than one piece, the
various pieces are also to be physically bonded together.
9.0
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
This agreement shall allow for preventive maintenance as well as for call outs for fault / repairs
which may occur from time to time to the installation.
Following completion and certification of the system, the Contractor shall make ONE service call
per year, the time and dates of these calls are to be agreed in advance by the two parties.
Tentatively this call shall be around the middle of the second quarter of each year. The Client
shall make the premises available to the contractor to carry out all necessary tests as stipulated
by the codes as well as the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The contractor is to include for the above agreement based on 2 years, with a possibility of being
extended to another 3 years. The contractor is also to indicate the proposed hourly rates for call
outs.
10.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATION
Early streamer emission systems containing a radioactive source shall not be used.
MTS Consulting Limited
60
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
SECTION X – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The project shall have a building management system (BMS) which shall provide the operator the
monitoring and control facilities listed in the following specifications.
The BMS contractor shall design an integrated building management system which would offer
the necessary flexibility for integrating the control of various systems from the same management
software, through the required programming. Accordingly, all systems forming part of the BMS
shall communicate through and be linked with the project’s IT system.
Parts of the building services, which may be installed by separate third parties, (Stand alone
systems) shall be complete with the manufacturer’s management software tool. Such systems,
although forming part of the project’s BMS, will not require any specific tasks by the BMS
contractor since the same parties will be responsible to install and commission the management
system associated with the respective service.
The paragraphs to follow give descriptions of the BMS performance and requirements for both
scenarios i.e. in cases where these shall be provided within manufacturer’s management tool, or
when these have to be catered for using the necessary hardware and programming system, by
the BMS designer and contractor.
All field devices required for monitoring and control the operation of services, shall be provided by
the BMS contractor, unless these have been included with the equipment by its manufacturer.
Such field devices shall be free issued to the installation contractor who will be given the
necessary briefing on the execution methods by the BMS contractor.
The scope of the BMS has been limited to the provisions of the project’s services which have
noticeable energy consumption and / or are significant for the successful operation of the facility.
The contractor is to provide with his offer at tender stage a general wiring topology of his proposal
including BMS hardware schematic to have a clear understanding of the proposed building
management
2.0
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SERVICES
The following list depicts the services which monitoring / control shall be included in the project’s
BMS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Electrical Mains Switchgear Panel
Roof top unit
Car park ventilation fan
Archive ventilation fan
Domestic cold water booster pump set
Second class water booster pump set
Hose reel pump set
Reservoir overflow transfer pump set
Water consumption meter (x1)
MTS Consulting Limited
61
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
10. Electrical consumption meters (x5)
11. VRF systems
12. Reservoir water level indicator
3.0
BUILDING MANAGEMENT
HARDWARE
OPERATING
PLATFORM,
SOFTWARE
&
The building management software shall be suitable to operate on Windows 7 or subsequent
system. Once BMS programming and commissioning shall be complete, it shall be uploaded on a
secured WAN which shall be maintained by the BMS works contractor. The management
software shall be accessed through a secured IP, using a common browser installed on the PC
and ideally through the traditional browsers available on android, apple and blackberry smart
phones.
The BMS software shall be provided with four user defined access logins. ‘User 1’ shall have full
rights, including software programming, uploading, display configuration, algorithms settings etc.
This user login shall be reserved for the BMS engineer and programmer. ‘User 2’ shall be
identical to ‘User 1’ with the only difference of not having access to modifying the software. ‘User
2’ will also need to be able to change passwords of subsequent users. This will be accessed and
used by the facilities engineer. ‘User 3’ shall be identical to ‘User 2’ but will not be able to change
the operational control of the main plant and equipment. Control shall be restricted to the simple
parameters like temperature set points, timer control, fan speed, on/off operation of FCU, etc.,
which extent needs to be coordinated during the initial stages of the project execution. ‘User 4’
shall be restricted to monitoring only.
Software management tools, provided by the various equipment manufacturers, shall be suitable
to be installed on multiple PCs. The respective software, which shall run following a successful
login, shall communicate to the respective equipment through the project’s IT system. It would
also be ideal if the equipment manufacturers offer an integrated solution to have the system
accessible on smart phones.
4.0
CONTROL PANELS
Control panels, including all necessary wiring and components shall be selected, designed,
supplied and installed by the BMS works contractor. The number of control panels required shall
be determined by the BMS works contractor. BMS contractor is therefore required to identify the
necessary power points required at tender stage so that their quote is accordingly included in the
tender. The following section refers to large control panels which might be required.
4.1
Control Panel Design (as required)
For the purpose of operation and safety, panels shall be considered as one assembly
and shall have a common appearance, layout, etc.
The control panel shall be designed to maintain all components within their environmental
temperature tolerance limits. The panel shall be properly vented. All vents designed in
such a way to limit ingress of dust.
The cost of each panel shall take onto account all internal power and control cabling
required. Cost for external cabling shall be separate and inclusive of its containment.
MTS Consulting Limited
62
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
External power cabling shall be terminated in a suitable isolator which cost shall be
included with the cost of the external cabling. Cost for cabling between the isolator and
the equipment shall be completed by equipment supplier.
All control cables shall be screened and neatly installed.
All wiring and component installation shall comply with the requirements of the British IEE
Regulations.
All materials shall be selected to suitable for the environment where they shall be
installed.
4.2
Control Panel Labelling (as required)
All panels and individual panel sections shall be provided with exterior labels to BS 5378,
Part I indicating the voltage within the panel section, clear warnings of risk and
instructions for isolation.
All switches, controls and indicators on control panels and cubicles shall be clearly
labelled as indicated on the drawings.
If the panel does not totally control the supply of electricity to associated plant, then a
notice affixed to the front of the panel shall warn the need for isolation elsewhere.
All cables shall be identified with permanently fixed numbered ferrules. The numbering
shall correspond to the numbers affixed to the terminals. Identification and coding should
well organized and in line with the schematic drawings and schedules, taking into
account any subsequent revisions up to handing over.
4.3
Control Panel Construction (as required)
Control panels shall be constructed to IP54. The doors and casing shall be manufactured
from galvanized steel, 2mm thick, folded and seam welded to form a rigid self-supporting
structure.
The panel shall be finished using a suitable two pack primer and adequate coats of top
coat electrostatic paint.
Each control panel shall have approximately 25% free space to facilitate the addition of
future equipment.
All panels shall be provided with adequate undrilled and / or detachable gland plates of
sufficient size and strength to accept glands for all types of cable conduits and cable
trunking intended for termination with the panel.
4.4
Control Panel Installation (as required)
All wiring within the panel shall be arranged in looms and / or perforated trunking. All
cables shall run continually from terminal to terminal without intervening joints. Panels
shall be internally partitioned to provide separation as a means of safety, wherever
necessary.
All terminations shall be fully shrouded, recessed or otherwise protected against
accidental contact.
MTS Consulting Limited
63
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Where live equipment cannot be isolated, it shall be covered with a Perspex shield
carrying appropriate warning labels in addition to the specified shrouding.
Wiring looms, cable ways and trunking should be sized to allow for 25% expansion or
addition. Flexible looms shall connect door mounted to interior mounted components
such that wires shall not weaken or break with repeated door opening.
4.5
General Panel Provisions (as required)
The panels are to be designed and installed in such a manner to:
Provide all devices and terminals necessary for interfacing controls.

Ensure that maintenance operations will not disrupt the general operation of the
equipment.

Provide scheduled interlocks to establish and maintain safe / pre-determined plant
conditions under all modes of operation including loss, reduction and restoration of
power.

Hard wire and test physical interlocks to ensure safe and / or sequenced operation of
the plant before control systems are set to work.

Provide manual control facilities as indicated in the schedules to enable user to
operate essential plant in the event of control failure.

Ensure that the manual control facilities do not override safety devices or interlocks.
External wiring from such panels, feeding essential equipment, shall be fire rated to
ensure all safety equipment remains in operation in case of emergencies.
4.6
Control Panel Features (as required)
The panel shall include all the necessary equipment, including circuit breakers,
contactors / starters with overloads, start / stop push buttons, run / trip indication, manual
/ off / auto switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, insulated transformer, means of isolation,
wiring etc., to provide the facilities listed hereunder, besides what is listed in the relevant
schedules.

Power phases indicating lights (L1, L2, L3)

Lamp test facility

Lockable isolating handle

Status indicator

Voltage / Current indicators for each phase / between phases

On indicator lamps for circuits in operation

Emergency push button allowing manual shutdown of the complete panel and
flashing light indicator
Panels are to include an electrical kWhr consumption meter. This meter shall be digital /
electronic type and complete with a 5 digit LED or LCD screen display which shall be
installed on the panel’s fascia. The meter shall operate at a nominal voltage of 380v at
50Hz.
MTS Consulting Limited
64
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
4.7
C43284
HMI (as required)
The management software, which shall be provided by the BMS contractor, shall also be
accessed through an interface installed on the fascia of each MCC. The HMI shall
therefore consist of a micro-computer system having Microsoft Windows installed as the
operating platform. The operating system shall have the necessary browser to access the
management software. A touch screen control visual display shall be installed flush onto
one of the panel’s doors. The display shall be sized 15’ minimum.
Both MCC shall display the mains supply voltage, running current, and kWhr
consumption on separate displays / indicators / meters installed also on the panel’s
fascia. Such data shall also be linked with the BMS software so that it can be accessed
remotely. The following sections lists of the monitoring and control ancillaries which are
required to be installed on each of the motor control centre.
5.0
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FEATURES,
PERFORMANCE
&
The following paragraphs describe the facilities which shall be offered by the BMS and by the
software management which shall be provided by the manufacturer’s of the systems as
applicable.
5.1
Electrical Mains Switchgear Panel (MSG)
The BMS contractor shall interface the system to monitor the mains supply voltage,
running current per phase and kWhr consumption. The system shall also monitor the
running current and kWhr consumption of all outgoing supplies from the MSG.
5.2
Roof top unit
These units shall be supplied with a compatible interface supplied by the manufacturer in
order to link with the project BMS. Hence the BMS contractor needs to liaise with the
HVAC works contractor in order to ensure that the BMS would be capable to offer the
following operational monitoring and control facilities:
On / Off

Set point temperature

Outdoor temperature

Filter conditions

Fans operation

Operating currents

Mains voltage

Energy kWhr consumption

Operation scheduling

Alarms
MTS Consulting Limited
65
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
5.3
C43284
Car Park & Archives Ventilation Fans
The following operational control and monitoring facilities shall be provided by the project
BMS:-
5.4

On / Off

Operation mode setting (Auto or Manual)

Operation scheduling

Run / Trip monitoring
Pump Sets Control Panels
These shall be provided with a manufacturer’s software management tool. Amongst
many features which such a tool can offer to the operator, the following requirements are
compulsory:
On / Off

Pump operation

Discharge pressure

Motor RPM of each pump

Water pressure on suction header

Energy kWhr consumption

Operation scheduling

Trip, faults and alarms
Provision for monitoring only shall be supplied for the hose reel pump set.
The software shall include a high level interface for linking to project BMS. Hence the
BMS works contractor needs to liaise with the mechanical works contractor to ensure
such provision is included the tender.
5.5
Reservoir Over Flow Transfer Pumps
Pumps shall be interfaced with the BMS in a way to provide the following operational
control and monitoring facilities:-
5.6

On / Off

Operation mode setting (Auto or Manual)

Operation scheduling

Run / Trip monitoring
Electrical & Water Meters
The BMS contractor shall interface all the electrical and water meters to monitor and
record the consumption in kWhr and m³ respectively.
MTS Consulting Limited
66
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
5.7
C43284
Variable Refrigerant Flow AC
These shall be provided with a manufacturer’s software management tool. Amongst
many features which such a tool can offer to the operator, the following requirements are
compulsory:
Energy kWhr consumption (outdoor unit)

Individual indoor units operation

Fan speed

Temperature set point

Filter condition monitoring

Operating mode

Operation scheduling

Trip, faults and alarms
The software shall include a high level interface for linking to project BMS. Hence the
BMS works contractor needs to liaise with the mechanical works contractor to ensure
such provision is included the tender.
Although each indoor unit shall be equipped with a dedicated wall mounted controller, the
management software may be set to override the selective control features provided in
the wall mounted controller. When in this mode, the wall mounted controller shall not
show any indications signifying override.
5.8
Reservoir Water Storage
This panel shall have an output which will be used to link with the project BMS for remote
monitoring. The contractor shall also allow for the programming of alarming the operator
that the water level has reached a settable value, signifying filling required.
The BMS shall be programmed to have the facility to give operational commands to
certain equipment and ancillaries, when the water level inside the reservoirs reaches
settable levels.
6.0
FIELD DEVICES (FOR REFERENCE AS APPLICABLE)
All field devices shall be supplied by the BMS contractor and handed over to the M&E contractor
for installation. The installed position shall strictly follow manufacturer’s recommendations. All
field devices shall be neatly connected to the system and in such a way that they could easily be
removed and re-installed using common hand tools.
6.1
Temperature Sensors
Two types of sensors are required. One type shall be used for measuring water
temperatures whilst the other for measuring air temperatures. The former shall be
installed at various points within the heating water and domestic hot water system whilst
the latter shall be use in the HVAC system. The BMS contractor is to refer to the
drawings for further details.
MTS Consulting Limited
67
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, M&E Systems
C43284
Water temperature sensors shall have a probe, which shall be of adequate length to read
o
the average temperature of the medium properly. It shall have an accuracy of +/- 0.1 C.
Such requirements are also applicable to the sensors used on air systems.
6.2
Air Differential Pressure Sensors
These shall be installed across the filters of the air handling units, in addition to the
inclined manometer system which is used for local different pressure reading. The digital
pressure differential system shall have an accuracy of at least +/- 5Pa and shall give a
steady reading whilst the air handling unit is in operation.
6.3
Modulating Valves
Modulating valves which operation shall be controlled by being interfaced to particular
temperature sensors installed within the system (through the BMS) shall be provided in
the heating circuits and chilled water circuits. Valves shall be selected to divert water
through the bypass pipework during part load situations.
6.4
Air Flow Grid
An air flow grid shall be installed on the main air supply and main return air ducts of all air
handling units. Such flow grid shall be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall signal the reading on the BMS system.
7.0
CABLING, WIRING TOPOLOGY, CONTAINMENT, POWER SUPPLIES &
LABELLING
All such provisions shall be catered for by the BMS works contractor. Although there shall be
other containments used by the multiple disciplines, the wiring containment for the BMS system
shall be dedicated.
The design of the wiring topology shall be in such a way to maintain cable lengths to a minimum
and that they would remain accessible as much as possible. The contractor shall produce
schematic drawings and layouts of the wiring throughout the entire project before commencement
of works.
Galvanised steel wire baskets are the preferred option for containment, although other options
may be acceptable. Single wiring shall be routed through flexible galvanised conduits, whether
installed internally or externally. Such conduit shall be neatly terminated using grommets.
The BMS works contractor shall supply and install all power cabling required from the MCC to
each isolator placed in close proximity to each of the fixed equipment. The isolators are to be
included by the BMS contractor.
The system shall be properly using durable weatherproof tags throughout. The text shall have a
height of around 1cm.
MTS Consulting Limited
68
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Photovoltaic System Layout – Level +5
43284-PV-01
*Note: An unlocked electronic version of the above drawings can be made available to the successful
Tenderer who is awarded the contract as detailed in the bill of quantities. These drawings would be
issued for the sole purpose of the preparation of ‘Installation’ and ‘As-fitted’ drawings of this particular
project and they are not to be transmitted or copied in any form to third parties without the written
permission of Mediterranean Technical Services Limited.
MTS Consulting Ltd
F08/Rev.03
21
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Ltd
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Ltd
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Ltd
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Ltd
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
MTS Consulting Ltd
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Ltd
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
MTS Consulting Ltd
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Ltd
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Ltd
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Ltd
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Ltd
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Ltd
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
C43284
SECTION III - PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Introduction
Bank of Valletta plc intends to install a grid-connected poly-crystalline Silicon (poly-Si)
photo-voltaic (PV) system to provide solar power in the new extension in St. Venera.
The PV systems are intended to have the following specifications:
Approx. no. of panels
Total power rating
Type of installation
Expected generation
24
6-8.3kW p
Structure mounted at
o
15
8.8-11.7MWh/year
The system output is to be designed, supplied, installed and commissioned, as a
complete, all-inclusive, system, on the premises. The power generated by this system
shall be metered and fed into the Enemalta Corporation grid.
1.2
Design criteria – Roof installation
The contractor is invited to propose an installation on the roof area provided whilst
observing the following constraints:

All PV panels shall be sited in arrays facing as South as possible but also aligned to
the building, as shown in the notional layout;

All PV panels shall be installed on a horizontal structure with the PV panels above it
at an inclination of 15˚.

For maintenance and access purposes, an adequate clear corridor (walk-ways), free
from any obstructions, is to be allowed as indicated in the drawing.
A PV array layout is shown for guidance purposes only in the drawing 43284-PV-01,
Photovoltaic System layout.
The PV panels shall be organised in a number of strings in series and then paralleled if
necessary inside a main PV array junction box. This will allow disconnection of each
string, when required. Adequate protection shall be provided against earth fault, over
current, reverse voltages and voltage surges.
MTS Consulting Ltd
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
1.3
C43284
Location
All items offered shall be designed and manufactured to take into account the most
onerous local ambient conditions. The maximum ambient shade temperature is to be
taken to be 45°C and the minimum as 2°C with a yearly average of 24°C. The relative
humidity varies between 30% and 80%, averaging 65%. The system shall withstand high
wind gust speeds up to 123 km/h. Special consideration should be taken in the design of
structural mounting elements required to support the PV panels.
1.4
Permits
The contractor, in collaboration with the client, shall apply for approvals, permits and
consumption meters from the Malta Resources Authority (MRA), the Malta Environment
and Planning Authority (MEPA) or the Enemalta Corporation wherever necessary.
1.5
Registration of equipment
The PV technology shall be approved and registered by MRA in line with Government
Notice No.52. Proof of compliance shall be made through submission of true certified
copies of the certificate issued by third-party certifying bodies.
2.0
PV SYSTEM
2.1
System type
The PV modules are to be protected using Class II insulation and shall have CE marking.
They shall meet the relevant requirements of EN 61215 or EN 61646 and EN 60364 or
equivalent.
The PV panels themselves shall be manufactured to industrial grade or standards,
enclosed within a non-reflective toughened glass cover to ensure protection from hail,
dust and water.
The system shall include all output cables, junction box, replaceable bypass diodes, DC
isolators, surge protection units, connectors as necessary and warning notices.
2.2
System efficiency
The cells, forming the modules shall have an efficiency of not less than 15%, whilst the
module, as a group of cells, shall have an efficiency of not less than 13%. These
efficiency values must be guaranteed by the manufacturer for a minimum of five years
from the commissioning of the system.
The PV modules shall have a warranty of 20 years that guarantees a power output of
more than 80% of the minimum peak power at STC.
MTS Consulting Ltd
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
2.3
C43284
Support structure
The support structure for the PV modules shall be of anodised aluminium or hot dipped
galvanised steel and as approved by the manufacturer. It shall be suitable to withstand
the local environment and be of a material that is compatible with the PV units. Any
dissimilar materials (between the PV panels and the support structure) should be
provided with the necessary isolation to ensure that no direct physical contact takes place
between them thereby limiting the possibility of galvanic corrosion. The supporting
structure shall be robust and to be approved by the PV manufacturer and certified by a
structural engineer.
2.4
Inspection and Maintenance
The successful contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all necessary maintenance
and inspection for a period of two years following the commissioning of the system.
Payment for this service should be included in the B.O.Q. This shall include at least a
visual inspection every 6 months and a yearly service. A report for each inspection and
service shall be submitted to the Purchaser.
The contractor shall ensure that when a fault occurs and is reported, the plant shall not
remain out of service for more than 14 days.
3.0
INVERTER/ GRID INTERFACE PROTECTION UNIT
3.1
System type
The PV modules are to be stringed in groups, depending on the number and rating of
inverters used. The number of invertors is to be determined by the contractor. Where
possible, each inverter shall be connected to the same number of PVs such that each
inverter will produce the same A.C. power output. The three phase inverter/s shall be
suitable to connect and protect the PV modules to a three-phase 400V (±10%) 50Hz low
voltage supply.
3.2
Requirements
Each inverter unit shall be installed on the roofs and shall provide an overall maximum
efficiency exceeding 90%.
Each inverter shall be capable of automatic, continuous and stable operation over the
range of voltages, currents and power levels for the size and type of PV array used at
any ambient condition. It shall include a display showing key system information such as
voltages, currents and power and system status. The inverter shall have an in-built DC
isolator complete with a kWh meter.
MTS Consulting Ltd
15
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
3.3
C43284
Standards and compliance
Each inverter unit shall be protected using Class II insulation and must have CE marking.
Harmonic current emission on mains shall comply with EN 61000-3-2 Class A or
equivalent. The inverter shall have electromagnetic compatibility and emissions compliant
with European standards and shall satisfy safety requirements of EN 50178 or
equivalent. All low voltage equipment shall comply with insulation coordination
requirements given in EN 60664 or equivalent.
3.4
Cabling
Cabling from the PV array to the inverter shall be kept as short as possible and selected
to meet voltage and current requirements. Appropriate PV cables shall be used using
special PV plug connectors which are DC rated. All outdoor cabling shall be protected
from weather conditions and any impacts it may be subjected to. Hot-dipped galvanised
cable tray shall be provided as required.
3.5
Guarantees
Each inverter shall have a minimum of a 7-year repair or replacement warranty period
from commissioning, this warranty being given by the manufacturer, both covering parts
and labour. The Contractor shall provide evidence of competence in repairing the
inverter, or maintaining a stock of spare parts in Malta, or delivery from the manufacturer
in less than 2 calendar weeks.
3.6
Grid connection
Each inverter and grid interface protection unit must comply with Engineering
Recommendation G83/1 [Recommendations for the connection of small-scale embedded
generators (up to 16A per phase) in parallel with public low-voltage distribution networks]
or equivalent and a type verification test sheet must be included with the offer. If an
equivalent alternative recommendation or standard is proposed, the Tenderer shall
submit all the necessary information to confirm equivalence.
4.0
MONITORING
Provision shall be made for a data logging system to monitor and log the status and performance
of the PV system. This shall be interfaced with the Building Management System (BMS).
The data logging system shall store key PV system parameters including equipment status, DC
voltages and currents, AC voltages and currents, instantaneous power (kW) and energy (kWh).
This data needs to be read off Microsoft Excel
required, including the PC.
MTS Consulting Ltd
TM
and the supplier shall provide all the software
16
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, PV Systems
5.0
C43284
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The contractor is to supply and install all items forming part of the grid-connected PV panel
system, including all panels, inverters, power and control cabling, earthing, junction boxes,
conduit, cable trays, switchgear, protective equipment and all other necessary electrical,
instrumentation accessories and support structures at roof level.
The PV framing sections shall be interconnected to form an electrically continuous path and
connected to the building’s lightning protection system. The Alternative Energy Contractor is to
provide all necessary metalwork to achieve a compliant system.
Electrical installation shall comply with EN 60439 and EN 60947 or equivalent. All wiring will be
carried out in accordance to IEE Wiring Regulations Seventeenth Edition and EN 60364-7-712 or
equivalent. This shall be protected from mechanical impact and the elements through appropriate
cabling, insulation and ratings.
Cables shall be contained in appropriate galvanised conduit or galvanised cable trunking or
galvanised cable tray.
All junction boxes shall be fabricated from a non-conductive material, be UV stabilised, offer IP55
protection (or better) and shall be labelled appropriately. The junction boxes shall be protected
using Class II insulation.
It is to be noted that the roof waterproofing integrity shall be maintained; therefore the method of
waterproofing reinstatement must be acceptable to the client or his representatives.
Prior to project completion, the contractor is to supply a brief of health and safety considerations,
as built drawings of electrical schematic, PV array arrangement, data logging system schematic
and manuals for the:
1. Installation and operation of PV modules, including commissioning procedure
2. Operation and maintenance (service) of inverter including commissioning procedure
3. Operation and maintenance of the data logging system including any sensors, hardware and
software
A completed acceptance test form must also be provided.
6.0
TECHNICAL SUBMISSION
The contractor shall submit clear drawings showing dimensions of support structures, materials
used and also the method that will be used to anchor panels and support structures on the roof.
The drawings shall also show the area of the roof that will be utilised and also the access routes
between PV modules and between the arrays and the roof boundary.
Where standards need to be met, certificates of compliance shall be provided as proof.
Contractor shall also submit full technical literature of materials and equipment clearly showing
the name of the manufacturer and the type or model number of the item being offered as required
in the list of manufactures.
MTS Consulting Ltd
17
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREAMBLE
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the following specifications, all equipment and materials offered
have to be to their respective National MSA EN standards as approved, endorsed and listed on the
Government Gazzette dated 4th October 2000 and subsequent additions. Items, which do not fall within
this list, shall be to their respective BS or EN or IEC standards.
Equivalent standards from non-EU countries can be considered subject that it is proven to the Engineer’s
satisfaction that such standards are equivalent, or superior, to the BS or EN or IEC counterpart.
Furthermore, all equipment and materials, which fall under legal notices, issued pursuant to the Quality
Control Act. (Cap. 225) must bear the CE mark.
OPENINGS
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all chases in all walls / floors. Horizontal chases in wall
will not be permitted unless specific approval from the Architects/Civil Engineers is obtained. He shall
also be responsible to provide any holes or aperture up to a size equal or equivalent to 270mm x 200mm.
The contractor shall be responsible to make good all holes or apertures of any size which were provided
by himself. All exposed hollows from bricks resulting from chasing, and other builders work carried out by
the M&E contractor, are to be filled using C15 concrete as part of this contract.
The Client shall provide apertures in excess of 270mm x 200mm following details given by the Contractor.
On his part, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide sleeves to be inserted in all such apertures
prior to their opening by the Client. Making good between the sleeve and the aperture shall be the
responsibility of the client. Sealing or chalking with approved materials between sleeves and services
passing through it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
FIRE STOPPING
Wherever services pass from one fire compartment to another, approved fire stopping material is to be
applied by the Contractor to all service penetrations including cable trunking, cable trays, etc., and
between sleeves and the service passing through them.
DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
Unless specifically authorised by the Architect, the contractor shall not be allowed to puncture the damp
proof membrane.
COMMISSIONING
The contractor has to balance, test and commission all the engineering systems in such a manner so as
to demonstrate their proper operation and performance of all systems and equipment, as intended and at
the specified conditions, unless otherwise stated. All commissioning shall be to C.I.B.S.E. guidelines or
approved equivalent.
MTS Consulting Ltd
1
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
CERTIFICATION
All systems or equipment, which need to be certified by Law or by any Legal Notice, are to be so certified
by a person/body as contemplated by the same law/legal notice. Such certification is to be forwarded to
the Engineer with all the other contract drawings and information.
POLICE COMMERCIAL OPERATING LICENSE
Should the Commissioner of Police request the client to provide a report on the whole of the electrical
installation and plant, for the purpose of granting a Commercial Operating Licence, the Contractor is to
prepare this report in the appropriate format. This report is to be signed by a competent warranted
Engineer and handed over to the Client within three days of it being requested.
MTS Consulting Ltd
2
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION I – GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The complete electrical installation system and all equipment shall be manufactured, installed and
tested in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards or as listed equivalent to:
1.2
a.
The current edition of the Electricity Supply Regulations, as issued by the Malta
Resources Authority.
b.
The current edition of the I.E.T. Wiring regulations, as issued by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology (IET).
c.
British Standard Specifications.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The incoming electricity supply shall be three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 volts, 50Hz, neutral and
earth system. All items making up the electrical installation, such as all equipment, motors, light
fittings, control gear, accessories, switchgear, etc. shall be rated to operate at these voltages
accordingly.
1.3
FIXINGS
Screw fixings in brickwork, concrete or similar structural substances, on external face or in damp
situations and which necessitate plugging, are to be made with plastic plugs or other approved
materials.
Screws used in exposed conditions or in damp situations shall be of brass or other approved
non-rusting materials. The Engineer must approve alternative fixing methods.
Heavy apparatus shall be secured by rawl bolts securely grouted in or by an equal and approved
method.
Equipment fixed to parts of the structure shall be fixed in accordance with the instructions of the
Architect, so that the load bearing of the structure members or the efficiency of waterproofing will
not be affected.
1.4
PROTECTION OF FLOOR CONDUITS AND WATER PIPES
It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all the installed conduits and wiring will remain
undamaged, even by third parties, during all the phases of the execution of this project. It is thus
recommended that all conduits, laid on the ground, are suitably protected against damage or
breakage by a cover of cement and sand mortar.
All water pipes, laid on the ground, are to be installed within appropriately sized PVC sleeves,
which are also to be covered of cement and sand mortar.
MTS Consulting Ltd
3
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The cost of the above is to be incorporated in the respective installation rates.
1.5
SERVICES AND WATER CULVERTS
If any privately or Government owned water culverts, services for water, electricity, gas, drainage,
etc. passing through the site will be effected by the works, the contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service, in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the service
and of the Engineer. The alternative service shall be installed before cutting the existing service.
Care shall be taken not to damage existing culverts and watercourses and any other existing
underground services. If any of these are damaged, these are to be made good at the
contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the authority concerned. The contractor should give
notice to the Authority if excavation is to be carried out near any existing services and obtain their
respective consent before any work is started. The contractor is to give notice to the
Commissioner of Police and Director of Public Works and all other interested authorities before
the excavation of pits is commenced. Such notice should conform to current regulations in force.
1.6
BRACKETS AND FIXTURES
The brackets shall all either be the equipment manufacturer’s standard brackets, or else
proprietary brackets, made by specialised bracketing manufacturers. Only where these are
deemed inadequate to meet special local situations will locally fabricated brackets be accepted,
and this strictly with prior permission from the Engineer.
All brackets, fixtures, supports, etc., are to be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing.
1.7
CONSUMPTION SUB-METERS
All the consumption meters, as may be installed within all the electrical and mechanical system,
have to be individually calibrated and certified by the meters’ manufacturer prior to installation.
Original certificate of such calibration tests is to be handed over to the client and/or Consultant
Engineer, as part of the commissioning documents for the project.
1.8
CABLE TRUNKING, TRAYS AND BASKET
The Contractor shall supply and install cable trunking/tray/basket in all positions indicated on the
Drawings, as detailed in the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.1 General
(a)
Earth bonding is required between all lengths metallic trunking/tray/wire basket
and boxes, etc. Bonding shall be by copper strips of 12 x 2mm minimum
sectional dimensions, fixed by M4 brass screws.
(b)
Where special fittings or sections of metallic trunking/tray/wire baskets are
fabricated on site, they shall be prepared and finished to the same standard of
the manufacturers’ standard items.
(c)
MTS Consulting Ltd
Fixing of metallic trunking/tray/wire basket shall be made at regular intervals not
exceeding 1m and at 200mm from bends and intersections.
4
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
1.8.2 Galvanised Trunking
(a)
The trunking shall be manufactured from 1mm galvanised steel sheets. The lid
shall be secured with self-tapping screws and on no account is the length of the
lid to exceed 1.8m in any one whole section.
(b)
Boxes, tee boxes, etc. shall be complete with fly over separation units in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
(c)
Holes in trunking shall be arranged to avoid undue setting of entering conduits.
Joints in trunking shall be made in such a way as to ensure electrical continuity
between the various lengths of trunking.
(d)
Where trunking passes through holes in the building structure, a cover plate shall
be fixed to the trunking before installation and shall be arranged to project at
least 50mm beyond the finished surface of the wall.
(e)
Where trunking is employed and sizes are not detailed on the Drawings, or in the
Specification, such trunking shall be capable of containing 50% additional cables
of the average size of the conductors to be installed in the trunking without
exceeding the space factors laid down in the I.E.E. Regulations.
(f)
Trunking over the false ceiling shall be supported as necessary.
1.8.3 PVC Trunking
(a)
The PVC trunking and accessories shall be of the self-extinguishing type.
(b)
The trunking shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be higher
than 60 ºC .
(c)
The trunking shall be supplied complete with lid, cable separators for the whole
length (when cables for more than one service are installed), back-boxes for the
wiring accessories and proprietary mounting accessories, such as flat angles,
tees, inner and outer corner assemblies and corner covers, end caps, joint
covers etc.
1.8.4 Galvanised Tray
MTS Consulting Ltd
(a)
Cable trays shall comprise elongated perforated sheet steel trays turned up at
the edges and be hot-dipped galvanised after manufacturing. The widths of tray
shall be as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(b)
For trays up to 225mm wide, 1mm sheet shall be used with a minimum average
galvanisation zinc thickness of 45 microns (μm). For widths above 225mm,
1.5mm sheet shall be used having a minimum average galvanisation zinc
thickness of 55 microns (μm). Flange height of cable tray shall be not less than
40mm or as stated in the drawings or Bills of Quantities.
(c)
Mushroom–head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories.
(d)
Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be bushed.
5
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
1.8.5 Wire Basket
1.9
(a)
The wire basket shall be manufactured from Yellow Zinc Dichromate plated steel
wire.
(b)
For up to 200mm wide, the wire baskets shall be constructed from 3.5mm
diameter steel wire and from 5mm diameter steel wire for the larger sections.
(c)
The tray width and depth shall be as stated in drawings or Bill of Quantities.
(d)
The wire basket shall be supplied with all appropriate accessories such as clip on
couplers or bolt-on splice plates, fixing bolts, etc.
(e)
The lengths of the wire basket can be cut, bent, formed and jointed to
accommodate straight runs, changes of direction and changes in levels.
CONDUIT REPLACEMENT BY TRUNKING
Should the electrical contractor opt to modify the proposed electrical installation design, so as to
facilitate installation work, the contractor may replace a number of conduit runs by a suitably
sized trunking run. This will only be accepted if this replacement does not have any financial
implications to the client.
1.10
PROVISION OF LIGHT FITTING SAMPLES
The client reserves the right to ask for the provision of samples of all the light fitting types at the
tender evaluation stage.
It is mandatory that, prior to the ordering of the light fittings, the appointed contractor is to submit
technical literature and a sample of each of the light fitting types, complete with lamps.
Associated costs, if any, for the provision of these samples is to be factored within the cost of the
light fittings at the tender computation stage.
MTS Consulting Ltd
6
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION II – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
LABEL AND CIRCUIT LISTS
(a)
All switchgear, distribution boards, consumer unit and isolators shall be fitted externally
with black engraved Trifoliate labels, with 6mm high lettering, showing the individual code
name or number, adequately defining the function of the switchgear concerned, phase
identification, where applicable and the equipment or area being served by the
switchgear.
(b)
Each distribution board shall be fitted internally with a circuit connection schedule, or a
circuit list, inside a transparent type envelope, which will be permanently fixed inside the
door of the board.
The list shall indicate the location of the lighting points, socket outlets, or equipment
being supplied off the individual circuits in the board, each outgoing circuit’s cable size
and rating of the miniature circuit breaker, as appropriate.
Circuit lists shall be typed and all precautions are to be taken to ensure non-fading of the
typed lettering.
2.0
(c)
Labels shall be attached to the barriers of each distribution board, indicating the
reference number of each individual circuit shown on the circuit connection schedule.
These reference numbers or letters are also to be reproduced on the circuit connection
schedule, for easier cross-reference.
(d)
All labels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION
(a)
During the progress of the work and upon completion, the Contractor shall carry out such
tests and provide such apparatus, instruments and materials as the Engineer/Employer
may consider necessary, or may be reasonably demanded to prove compliance with the
Contract.
(b)
In his Tender offer, the Contractor is to allow for making all the necessary tests, in the
presence of the Engineer of the Employer.
(c)
Upon completion of the works and again at the end of the Defect’s Liability Period the
whole of the electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
enumerated in the I.E.E. Regulations (latest edition). Full tests are to be made on:
MTS Consulting Ltd
(i)
Continuity of protective and final circuit conductors;
(ii)
Verification of polarity;
(iii)
Continuity of main and supplementary earth bonding;
(iv)
Insulation resistance, between phase and neutral conductors and between each
of these and earth;
(v)
Earth continuity;
(vi)
Balancing of electrical load on the three voltage phases;
7
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
(vii)
Earth electrode resistance;
(viii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices (RCDs).
C43284
Any irregularities or faults, which result from, the tests have to be rectified immediately
and the necessary tests conducted again.
(d)
3.0
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed
record of all tests carried out, accompanied by a Certificate of the Final Test for the whole
electrical installation of the project. The test certificate shall be in similar format to that
required by the Regulations of Enemalta Corporation (Electricity), for new or upgraded
power supplies and must be submitted before the installation can be passed as correct
and safe for its use.
STEEL CONDUITS INSTALLATIONS
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be installed in accordance with the relevant technical
regulations. All external installations shall be in galvanised conduits and made effectively
watertight throughout.
Conduit connections to all internal and external equipment shall be carried out in flexible conduit
and terminated by means of heavy brass split adapters with a separate earth connection. In
external or potentially wet or damp situations, flexible conduit shall be of the watertight type.
4.0
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND FIXING.
(a)
PVC conduit shall be installed in accordance to the latest I.E.T. Regulations and the
Enemalta Corporation's Regulations are to be followed regarding any special requirements
for the installation of non-metallic conduit in a system.
(b)
All conduits, conduit fittings and conduit boxes shall be of the self-extinguishing material
type.
(c)
Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be used where the ambient temperature would be
higher than 60 deg C or lower than 5 deg C.
(d)
Conduit shall be seamless, polyvinyl tubing of the heaviest standard gauge,
manufactured expressly for electrical use. Flexible water tubing shall not be used.
(e)
Couplings and conduit entering conduit fittings shall all be sealed with PVC solvent to
ensure water-tightness and strength of joints.
(f)
Expansion couplers shall be used on surface installations of straight runs of conduit in
excess of six (6) metres. An expansion coupler shall also be fitted whenever a conduit
crosses an expansion joint in the structure.
(g)
Conduits concealed in wall chases shall only be installed in the vertical planes.
Horizontal chases will only be allowed up to a length of 500mm. Longer chases will only
be permitted if approved by the Architects.
(h)
Conduits installed surface over a false ceiling shall be supported by suitable hangers or
saddles without interfering with the soffit structure.
(i)
All bends on the conduits shall be made with a reasonable angle tolerance. Distortion or
damage on the bends due to bending shall be rejected.
MTS Consulting Ltd
8
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
5.0
6.0
C43284
(j)
All conduit fittings used shall be of same type and standards as that of the PVC conduit
used throughout the installation.
(k)
PVC boxes shall not be used for the suspension of lighting fixtures. Special care shall be
taken whenever a lighting fixture is to be installed directly on the PVC box, especially
when the fitting temperature exceeds 60 deg C.
WIRING SYSTEM
(a)
The wiring system shall consist of PVC or XLPE insulated copper cables drawn into conduit,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Technical Specifications or Drawings. Wiring
shall be carried out in single-core conductors, self-extinguishing type.
(b)
A loop-in wiring system is to be adopted to avoid jointing of the conductors in the conduit
fittings. Whenever joints in the conductors are to be made, the specific prior approval of
the Engineer is required. When permission is granted, insulated terminal blocks are to be
used for jointing in the conductors. The terminal blocks shall be contained in an
appropriate enclosure.
(c)
It is to be noted that no cables shall be passed through the back boxes of any electrical
accessory, unless the cables form part of the electrical circuit of that accessory.
(d)
When drawing cables into conduits, care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is
not damaged.
(e)
The maximum cable carrying capacities of conduit as indicated in the I.E.E. Regulations
shall not be exceeded.
CABLES
(a)
Single core cable in conduit or trunking shall have stranded plain copper conductors,
PVC or XLPE insulation voltage grade 450/750V, self-extinguishing material type.
Flexible fine stranded wiring cables shall be suitably terminated with lugs or soldered.
(b)
Armoured cables shall be the XLPE extruded bedding type, having galvanised steel wire
armour and PVC sheathed overall, to a 600/1000V voltage grade.
(c)
Each cable is to be manufactured in one complete length and no through joints will be
allowed without authorisation from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
cable conductor phasing from the main switchboard. Feeder terminals shall be
correspondingly marked at each end.
(d)
Armour clamps shall be provided for the cable entries into all metal clad gear. The glands
shall be screwed with conduit thread and secured to the cases with two locknuts. The
glands should be complete with all accessories such as. locknuts, earth tugs and
shrouds. Appropriate glands for different environments should be used.
(e)
Each multi-core cable must be supported to the cable tray by appropriate cable ties at
every 2.5 metres or less. Furthermore, each cable has to have a proprietary cable
identification tag at every 10 metres of its length and within 1 metre of its termination at
both ends at the switchgear. The tag is to identify both the Main Switchgear Panel at the
source and the switchgear at its termination.
MTS Consulting Ltd
9
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
(f)
7.0
C43284
Cables for protected circuits, that is, those supplying equipment, which need to continue
to function even during a fire outbreak, need to be the fire resistant type, to CWZ
classification in accordance with BS 6387, having an out fire barrier in mineral ceramic
(mica/glass) material. All cables to be terminated with fireproof glands at both ends. Such
cables include those supplying the smoke extraction fans at Basement Levels, the
Fireman's lifts and as specified.
CABLE TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES
The cable trenches are to be approximately 750mm deep. Before the cables are laid, the bottom
of the trench shall be lined with sifted sand to a thickness of 50mm to form a bed. The cables are
to be covered with tape marked 'Danger Electrical Cable'. After the cables are laid, the first
75mm depth of cover backfill is to consist of sifted sand over which reinforced concrete covers or
stone slabs are to be laid to cover the entire cable lengths. Following the trench back-fill, the
contractor is to see that the road surface is reinstated to the original condition.
8.0
SWITCH AND FUSE GEAR
(a)
All switch/fuse gear, distribution boards and consumer units, unless otherwise specified
shall be of the totally enclosed type, 500 volts rating, metal clad and arranged for conduit
entry. Switch and fuse gear shall be of the types and ratings indicated in the Technical
Specification and on the Schematic Diagram.
(b)
Switch/fuse gear shall be arranged generally to conform to the layout indicated on the
Schematic Drawing. This Drawing is diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval of his proposed switchgear layout, prior to ordering and installing.
(c)
In a single-phase circuit, all the isolators and switch fuses are to be double pole switching
type, having the 'live' pole connected to the left-hand terminal of the gear.
(d)
In a three-phase circuit, the switch/fuse gear can either be the triple pole switched type,
with an unswitched neutral link (TP&N), or else the four-pole switched type (TPN),
according to the Technical Specifications or Bill of Quantities for particular project.
(e)
The type of enclosures as indicated or as directed by the Engineer, shall be dust
protecting for all apparatus therein enclosed.
(f)
Metal clad weatherproof type enclosures shall be provided with a hot-dip galvanised
coating.
(g)
All fuse switches, switch fuses and isolators shall be of the front switch-handle type and
shall be constructed from heavy gauge zinc coated steel, damp and dust-proof protected.
Insulated barrier plates shall be fitted inside to prevent accidental access to the live
busbars.
(h)
The weatherproof isolators up to 63 amperes can be rotary-control switches, industrial
plastic type to IP 65, all others to be metalclad isolators to IP54 protection.
(i)
Isolators, switchfuses and fuse switches are to be rated for AC23 category of duty.
MTS Consulting Ltd
10
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
9.0
C43284
HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY CARTRIDGE FUSE UNITS
All fuse switch units, switch fuse units shall be complete with H.R.C. cartridge fuse links as
required.
Each fuse shall be correctly rated to suit the circuit and load it is controlling and they shall be
certified for category of duty 400 volts AC, having a fusing factor less than 1.5.
10.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, all TP & N distribution boards, shall be metal clad enclosure surface type
and are to be supplied with an integral three-phase pan assembly busbar system. These shall be
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and complete with an integral isolator, rated as
specified. A split integral busbar system is to be supplied where specified.
Similarly, unless otherwise specified, all SP & N consumer units shall be metal clad enclosure,
surface type and are to be supplied with a proprietary prong-type supply busbar. Each busbar is to
include a supply cable entry terminal at one end and an outgoing terminal point for each neutral
connected to it.
The main incoming isolator and the main residual current device in each enclosure must be two
separate units. Combined MCB/RCD units, as a main switch will not be accepted.
Outgoing circuits designated as 'spare' on the drawings shall be provided with the rated miniature
circuit breakers. All spaces within the distribution boards or consumer units, designated as
‘Blank’, shall include the proprietary plastic covers.
11.0
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER / MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be of high impedance quality, complete with thermal
magnetic overload unit inside the breaker and shall operate on both overload and short circuit
condition. Category of duty; C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for general circuits and category of
duty; D curve breaking capacity 10kA for inductive circuits supplying motor loads.
A safety 'off' lock mechanism must be a feature of the miniature circuit breakers.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated as specified and their construction shall allow for normal
current operations at a temperature, which is not lower than 35C. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be supplied from the same manufacturer.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be rated as specified in the drawing, having a rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 36 kA or 50kA for 1 second at 400
volts, as will be specified for each particular project.
12.0
RESIDUAL CURRENT BREAKERS WITH OVERLOAD (RCBO)
The RCBOs, rated as per distribution board schedules, occupying a single way within the existing
distribution board, shall be rated for a 30mA earth leakage tripping current. The RCBOs are to be
installed as a direct replacement of the MCBs. It may also be considered to have MCBs in their
position within the distribution board and a separate metal enclosure, to house double pole RCDs
to the above current ratings, installed on a DIN-rail. The cost of the metalclad enclosure and the
additional cabling between the MCBs and the RCDs is to be included in the costs.
MTS Consulting Ltd
11
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Any four pole RCDs are to be installed in this metal enclosure. Category of duty for the RCBOs is
to be C Curve, breaking capacity 6kA for all RCBOs and RCDs.
13.0
GENERAL EARTHING
All metalwork of electrical equipment (other than current carrying parts), all metal conduits, cable
trunking, metal armouring and sheathing of cables and earthing pin of sockets shall be properly
and adequately earthed, so as to secure full compliance with the I.E.E. Regulations and the
requirements of the Enemalta Corporation.
14.0
BONDING OF METALLIC STRUCTURES
All metallic structures that may inadvertently come in contact with the electrical supply are to be
properly bonded to Earth, as stipulated by the I.E.E. Regulations. These metallic units may
include, but are not limited to, building structures, stairs, metallic or aluminium partitioning, sinks,
fixed workshop benches etc.
Any metallic structure or equipment, which may be exposed to a lightning strike, is to be suitably
bonded to the lightning protection system, where applicable.
15.0
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
The cost of the installation of lighting fixtures is to include all 3 core PVC double sheathed cable,
where applicable, fixture mounting accessories such as screws, washers, rawl bolts, distance
spacers, etc. and lengths of steel wire or chain for the supporting of the fixture, should it be
required.
Gaskets on the cable boxes may also be required to render the installation waterproof, where
applicable.
MTS Consulting Ltd
12
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION III – FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply, install, test and commission the fire fighting systems which shall consist of a number of
hose reels fed from a dedicated hose reel pump, one dry riser in the escape staircase, wet
system tap-off from existing fire system, and a number of fire extinguishers.
The hose reel system shall have its water supply fed from reservoir below level -3.
All pipework relating to the fire fighting systems shall be carried out using galvanized steel.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All pipework shall be blanked off during the course of the installation to prevent any ingress of dirt
or other material, which may otherwise block the pipe-work. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible to comply with this provision under all circumstances. Tube ends shall be cut square
and all burrs removed prior to cleaning ends for jointing in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Piping shall rise in the direction of flow to pre-determined high points, where
provision shall be made for automatic air vents.
3.0
PIPEWORK
All pipework is to be installed as indicated in the drawings.
Pipework is to be installed following manufacturers recommendations and shall be suitably
labelled.
3.1
Galvanised steel pipework
All the fire fighting pipe-work shall be in medium grade galvanised steel. The pipework
shall be accordingly labelled.
The galvanized steel shall comply with the following requirements:
-
-
MTS Consulting Ltd
Pipes shall conform to EN 10255
Pipes shall be laid in compliance with building requirements and in such a way not to
affect structures or piping systems or interfere with equipment of other plants. All
pipework shall be passed over false ceiling, or within service spaces, and drops to
the hose reels shall be within the building structure. Approval for routing of pipework
shall be co-ordinated with the builder and shall be approved by the architect.
Pipework shall be installed straight and parallel to other services routed adjacent.
Pipework shall have screwed joints with taper threads and made with an approved
jointing compound.
Spare outlets shall be blanked off.
Supports shall strictly follow manufacturer’s instructions.
All pipework shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer and one coat of glass
finish, in accordance with the relative B.S. or E.N. standard.
The dry riser shall be fitted with ½” automatic air vents and valve at their highest points
13
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Installation and workmanship, including pipe joining, pipe sleeves, brackets, fixtures,
labelling, painting, coding, testing and commissioning shall be executed to the highest
quality workmanship and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The pipe shall be routed within a dedicated sleeve, prepared by others.
4.0
FIRE HOSE REELS
A wet swinging type automatic hose reel system complying with BS530, part I complete with
necessary fittings, is to be provided as fixed first aid equipment to contain any eventual fire in its
initial stage.
The contractor shall confirm with the architect, left hand or right hand installation of each hose
reel to suit the particular location.
Fire hoses shall be 30m long with a 19mm internal bore, 1 inch external bore diameter, non-kink
reinforced type and be complete with a 6mm spray jet plastic nozzle. The hose shall be
2.
hydraulically tested to withstand 5000 KN/m The hose shall be mounted on a steel drum and
complete with a galvanised steel inlet pipe.
5.0
FIRE FIGHTING CABINETS
The cabinet shall be split in two compartments, the top for hose reel and the bottom for the 2No.
extinguishers. Hinges shall permit the door to open 180 degrees. Stainless steel or aluminium
trimmings shall have a brushed satin finish. All fire fighting cabinets shall be suitable for a
recessed installation. Specific information regarding the finish of the cabinet shall be provided by
the architect and as such final approval shall be given by the interior designer / architect.
5.1
Hose Reel Cabinet
Hose reel cabinets shown on drawings shall measure approximately 840mm wide x
1600mm high x 250mm deep, and shall be divided in two compartments: one
accommodating a hose reel and another accommodating two portable fire extinguishers.
Each hose cabinet shall have instruction plate on the inside to the effect that “in case of
fire pull hose from reel and water will turn on automatically: the nozzle should at all times
be left in the open position.”
Each hose cabinet shall be equipped with a 1” lock shield valve, with renewable disc and
sheet. The top compartment of the cabinet shall be of sufficient size to accommodate a
30 metre automatic fire hose reel, the reel drum being mounted on the inside of a pivoting
door to facilitate pull out.
The bottom compartment shall accommodate 2 portable fire extinguishers as specified
below:
Basement levels:
- 1 x 6 Litres FOAM
- 1 x 6kg CARBON DIOXIDE
MTS Consulting Ltd
14
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
Other Areas:
- 1 x 6kg DRY POWDER
- 1 x 6kg CARBON DIOXIDE
Each compartment shall be conspicuously identified
‘EXTINGUISHERS’ as applicable in 50mm high lettering.
6.0
as
‘FIRE
HOSE’
or
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
These shall be of the lever operated type complete with safety-pin, which has to be pulled out
prior to discharge. The extinguishers shall have a controllable discharge and shall be fitted with a
pressure gauge and a ‘USED’ flag. The extinguishers shall carry the BS Kitemark to BS 5306
Part III or equivalent.
The fire extinguishers are to have the following capacities:



7.0
Dry Powder– 6kg
Foam – 6 Litres
CO2 – 6kgs
HOSE REEL PUMP SET
The hose reel fire pump shall be of the fully automatic packaged unit type consisting of two close
coupled pumps and pressure vessel, having a duty as specified, for each pump:
Flow rate:
150 litres/min
Head:
60 metres
The packaged unit shall include a pipeline pressure unit with flow switch, non-return valve, test
cock, pressure gauge and a pre-wired control panel, which gives automatic (and manual) changeover from ‘duty’ to ‘stand by’ pump, should the duty pump fail to deliver for any reason
whatsoever. The control panel shall also include a RUN and TRIP indicator and each of these
shall also have a NO VOLT CONTACT.
The pumps shall otherwise conform to the general pump specification. The assembly shall
include a flow switch which shall be interfaced to the fire alarm system by others.
The pump set shall have an output for the remote monitoring through BMS. In view of this, the
contractor is required to coordinate accordingly with the BMS installer/programmer prior to
ordering.
8.0
DRY RISER
The dry riser system shall be installed for use by the fire fighting brigade. An inlet breech for
connection by the fireman shall be located within the main entrance, as shown on the drawing.
Pipework shall consist of heavy gauge galvanised steel.
All termination points shall have landing valves as indicated in the drawing. Landing valves shall
be 2 ½”, with connection for couplings to BS336 (compatible with local fire brigade equipment).
The landing valves shall be installed in each level of the escape staircase.
MTS Consulting Ltd
15
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
9.0
C43284
FIRE HYDRANT
A 2½” lockable fire hydrant shall be placed along the façade of the building for firefighting use.
This shall be achieved by the use of the existing underground reservoir and fire pump in the
existing center. A 4” pipework shall be routed through the interconnecting tunnel to be built at
level -3. This will then feed the pipework supplying the hydrant along the façade of the new
center.
10.0
ACCESSORIES
10.1
Gate Valves
These shall be made from gunmetal with non-corrodible hand wheel. Pressed steel hand
wheels will not be accepted. Gate valves to BS 5154 PN 20 series B rated 20 Bar from 0
10 to 100 C. Non-rising stem type with threaded bonnet and one piece wedge. For
valves greater than 4”, cast iron valves shall be employed. These shall be to BS 5150
0
rated at 13.8 Bar from -10 to 65 C.
10.2
Check Valves
For sizes up to 3”, bronze check valves of the swing pattern type to BS 5154 PN 25
0
series B. These shall be rated at 25 Bar for temperatures -10 to 100 C and suitable for
mounting in horizontal and vertical (flow upwards) positions. Parts to be in gunmetal and
in brass. For sizes greater than 3”; cast iron check valves shall be supplied to BS 5153
PN 16.
10.3
Lock shield Valves
These shall have easy clean shields to match the shield or enclosure in the inlet valve.
Six loose keys shall be provided for each size of spindle. Where specified the lock shield
valve shall have characteristic discs as for regulating valves
10.4
Pressure Gauges
They are to be dial type, 100mm in diameter, and preceded by a shut off valve of
approved type, with ‘S’ pipe connection. Gauges shall be calibrated in metric units. They
shall be of good quality materials that withstand corrosion and clogging of indicator
handle. Gauges shall have 63mm dials (at least) and shall have a maximum read out of
6.0bars +/- 0.1bars.
10.5
Temperature Gauges
Thermometers complete with pockets shall be provided where shown on the schematic
drawing enclosed. They are to be of the dial type with reading scale in Deg. C. Gauges
are to have 63mm dials (at least) and shall have a temperature reading range between
o
o
o
0 C-60 C with an accuracy of +/- 1 C.
MTS Consulting Ltd
16
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
10.6
C43284
Automatic Air Vents
Automatic air vents shall be installed at all high points and sections in the pipework. The
type of vent that is to be used shall be either one of the following.
Automatic air vents, unless otherwise noted, shall have gunmetal bodies of not less than
15mm screwed connection, copper or stainless steel floats and guides and noncorrodible ball needle valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a
lock shield valve. Air release pipes shall be run to discharge at the nearest suitable
points.
Air bottles should be made from 50mm tube approximately 225mm long fitted with cap
and 4mm air cock. They shall be fitted to equal tees or 50mm connections whichever is
the greater. Where the air bottles are fixed outside of reach a 4mm extension tube shall
run from the cap to within 125mm of the floor, terminating with a 4mm air cock with
needle seat and loose key.
10.7
Strainers
Strainers shall be single type, with screwed BSP thread for bores up to and including 2
1/2” and shall be flanged for bores of 3 inches and above. The bodies of single strainers
of bores up to and including 2 1/2” shall be of gunmetal or bronze; for 3 inches bore and
above shall be of cast iron.
Straining cages shall be of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel and shall have 1.5mm
diameter perforations; the free area of the cage shall be at least five times the crosssectional area of the pipe. Cages shall be easily removable.
In addition to where shown on the drawings, strainers shall be fitted prior to all major
equipment including all pumps (pressure and circulating), air handling units, control
valves and flow meters.
10.8
Flexible Connections
0
These shall withstand pressures up to 16 Bar at 90 C. Bellows to be manufactured from
nylon cord reinforced neoprene rubber and steel flanges. Contractor shall seek approval
of such item from the Engineer prior to ordering and installation.
11.0
EXPANSION VESSELS
These are to be installed on pressurized water systems. Expansion vessel shall be divided into
two compartments by a special membrane or diaphragm of rubber composition which prevents
the water coming into contract with the air. The rubber bladder shall be replaceable. On one side
of the diaphragm the vessel is filled with air or nitrogen at the required pressure. The other
section of the vessel is connected directly to the water system. A correctly positioned air
separator will assist in de-aerating the water in the system.
All vessels are to be manufactured from stainless steel.
MTS Consulting Ltd
17
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.0
C43284
GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A gas suppression system for protection in the Archive floor at level -1 shall be installed.
The successful contractor is to take his own measurements and shall also take into account the
particular layout of the room before finalising his design. It is the contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that measurements are accurate.
The system and its components must all comply with the applicable standards to ensure safe and
effective operation.
12.1
System Operation
The system shall be capable of both automatic and manual operation. In both cases it
shall be possible to stop the release of the extinguishing medium during the delay period
by pressing a large red mushroom type switch marked “STOP”.
Two such switches shall be used, one within the protected space and another placed
next to the yellow gas-release call-point outside the door. Both shall be clearly labelled.
12.1.1 Automatic
The gas discharge panel shall, upon receipt of the first alarm, send a signal to
the main fire alarm panel, which will activate the normal fire alarm sounders. A
sounder outside the protected area shall also be activated directly by the panel.
Upon receipt of the second knock signal, the panel shall activate two
sirens/flashers, one inside the protected room and another just outside, and start
the delay period count. Once the delay period is over it will release the
extinguishing fluid.
12.1.2 Manual
When set to manual operation the gas discharge panel shall still send a signal to
the main panel and activate the first-knock sounder upon first activation but the
sequence will stop there.
Operation of the yellow release break-glass at any time, will instruct the panel to
go immediately to the second knock sequence as described under automatic
operation above.
All system components, system operation and general arrangements shall strictly
comply to relative British or European Standard and shall also meet fire
protection for electronic data processing installations as detailed in the latest
issue of BS 6266: 2002
Major components shall, moreover, shall have an approved BRE certification and
shall be listed in the current edition of the Red Book Volume 1, Part 7
MTS Consulting Ltd
18
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.2
C43284
Control Panel
The control panel shall have two detector input circuits. Both circuits need to sense the
alarm state before the extinguishing fluid is released. A time delay between evacuation
signals and the discharge of the fluid is to be incorporated. During the delay period two
local sirens, one of which shall be placed within the protected area, shall be activated.
Biased switches are to be provided both inside and outside the protected area, the
manual operation of either during the delay period will prevent the discharge of fluid.
A volt free contact in the panel shall be connected to the building’s fire alarm detection
system to give an alarm in case of fire in the protected room.
Wiring of the system is to be kept as short as possible and the panel shall be protected
against surges in power lines by its own, locally installed, surge protector Type A.
Although the surge protector can be installed within the panel enclosure, on board surge
protection only shall not be considered acceptable.
12.3
Detection
An aspiration system with sampling points in the three areas, (in the room, above soffit
and beneath the raised floor where applicable), as well as in the cabinets themselves, (by
means of capillary tubes from the main pipe above the soffit), shall be used for first knock
detection. Manufacturer’s specifications and engineering parameters shall be adhered to
at all times.
For the second knock detection, one optical and one ionisation detector shall be installed
in each space, (in the room, above soffit and beneath the raised floor).
12.4
Cylinder Valves
Each cylinder shall be equipped with a discharge valve capable of discharging liquid at
the required rate. The valve body shall withstand a pressure of not less than four times
the operating pressure and shall not leak upon being subjected to pressures of not less
than three times the operating pressure. Valves shall bear the manufacturer’s part
number.
Valve assemblies are to be certified by the LPCB
12.5
Discharge Nozzles
Discharge nozzles shall be manufactured in corrosion resistant material and be of
adequate strength to withstand expected working temperatures and pressures.
Permanent markings shall show the equivalent single orifice diameter and the
manufacturer’s part number. The contractor must ascertain that number and location of
nozzles shall be such that the design concentrations are established throughout the
protected area.
Discharge nozzles are to be certified by the LPCB.
MTS Consulting Ltd
19
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.6
C43284
Pipework
Galvanised threaded steel pipework and fittings shall be used and the grade employed
shall be able to withstand the expected pressures. All pipes and fittings shall conform to
the recommendations of BS 5306 section 10.3.3 to 10.3.5.
All fluid pipework shall be painted Red in accordance with the requirements of BS 381C;
and properly earthed.
It is important to ensure that all pipework is securely supported, making due allowance for
expansion and contraction. Care should be taken to ensure that the supporting structure
is strong enough to take the dynamic and static forces involved in such systems. Support
shall also be given near nozzles and shall be less than 100mm for pipes of 25mm or less
and less than 250mm for pipes larger than 25mm.
The contractor shall be responsible for correct location of hangers and alignment of
piping. Maximum span between hangers shall be in accordance with the table below. Any
piping not in proper alignment will have to be re-installed at no expense.
Pipe size
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
12.7
Maximum span (m)
1.0
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.4
3.5
3.7
4.3
Labels
Labels shall be supplied and fixed near each manual control and at the entrance to each
protected area. These labels shall strictly conform to figures 12 and 13 of BS 5306,
section 5.1.
MTS Consulting Ltd
20
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
12.8
C43284
Testing and Training
The contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer of the system, a comprehensive checklist to enable the engineer to witness that the tests are being carried out in a satisfactory
manner.
Tests shall include electrical connections, fluid tightness and correctly tightened nuts and
bolts of the system.
A room air-tightness integrity test shall be carried out by temporarily replacing the door
with a fan assembly as described in Appendix E of BS ISO 14520-1:2006. The gas hold
time shall be calculated and corrections made as necessary. A written report of this test
and resulting actions taken shall be presented to the engineer.
The installing contractor shall present operating and maintenance manuals during final
testing. Appropriate training shall be given to the client’s representatives until all are
perfectly conversant with the system’s controls and options during operation.
MTS Consulting Ltd
21
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION IV – FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
GENERAL
The design of the fire alarm detection system is intended to provide a category part 1 fire
protection throughout the entire levels as recommended in the BS:5839, latest editions.
With reference to ancillary equipment under fire alarm conditions, the proposed fire alarm
detection system shall override the proprietary controls to shut down the systems accordingly.
In areas where it is considered a high risk fire zone or contains critical equipment, an
extinguishing system shall be employed as a means of additional protection to protect equipment
or property from damage. This extinguishing system in subject shall be supplied completely with
its own proprietary operating panel by others. This shall communicate with the main fire alarm by
means of a standard industrial communication protocol RS232/485. A standard I/O interface has
also been included. The area shall still be covered with smoke detectors pertaining to the Fire
Alarm & Detection System as described in this section.
The positioning of the fire alarm detectors shall be co-ordinated accordingly with the A/C unit’s air
flow and lighting position without minimizing the efficiency of the fire detectors to operate
according to the manufacturer specifications in case of a fire situation.
The system shall have power back-up facilities which will last at least 24 hours normal
(unalarmed) operation and give a thirty minute alarm, in case of fire conditions.
All components of the system are to work in an ambient temperature range of zero to fifty
degrees Centigrade, with up to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing).
All components of the system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
The system shall be fully networked and integrated with the Main Fire Alarm panel located in the
security room in the main building at ground floor level. The existing panel is an Advanced system
based on the Mx-4000 protocol.
2.0
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
The four loop fire alarm panel (FAP) shall contain all hardware and software, including power
supply with power back-up facilities that will last at least 24 hours normal (unalarmed) operation and
give a thirty-minute alarm, in case of fire detection, as well as all interfacing required. The system is
to conform to BS:5839. It shall be addressable, complete with appropriate software in order to
detect real fires as quickly as possible while at the same time eliminating false alarms. The system
should be capable of reducing the sensitivity of a detector or group of detectors during specific time
periods.
The FAP shall be capable to analyse the condition of all input devices and automatically initiate
output states as dictated by the “cause and effect” schedule. The panel shall be programmed to
sound the evacuation signal upon first alarm. Zoning shall be achieved by programmed grouping of
addressable devices rather than by system wiring. It shall also print out a log of events, be they fire
alarms, fault alarms, supervisory alarms or manual intervention on the panel. The FAP shall be
easily accessible to firemen.
MTS Consulting Ltd
22
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The sound level of the devices shall conform to the sound level requirements specified in the BS
5839-8:2013.
The fire alarm control panel shall incorporate the following features:








Continuous supervision of all detector/sounder lines
Battery back-up and battery charger
'Charger on' lamp or indication
Test facility
Visual/audible system fault indication
Visual/Audible zone fault indication
Battery failure indication
'Silence Alarm' switch, key or button
'Volt free' contacts for operation of ancillary equipment.
Should an audible alarm be silenced any further alarm signals shall re-activate the sounders.
3.0
DETECTORS
All detectors shall:




Comply with B.S. 5446, Part 1 and B.S. 5445, Parts 5, 7 and 8 as appropriate.
Be interchangeable in a common plug-in base.
Have a local alarm state indicator.
Have possibility of remote alarm state indicator.
3.1
Optical Smoke Detectors
Optical smoke detectors shall be sensitive to visible smoke particles in the range of 0.5 to
10 micro metres. Consideration must be given in the design to minimise false alarms due
to ingress of dust or insects.
3.2
Heat Detectors
o
Fixed heat detector operating at 57 C.
4.0
MANUAL CALL POINT
Manual call points shall comply with BS 5839 Part 2.
The break glass call point switch shall be held in place by the edge of the glass which shall be
plastic coated to prevent fragmentation. Housed in a red thermo plastic case, the unit shall be
easily tested by appropriate probe key. The manual call point shall be furnished with a red LED to
indicate operation.
Manual call points shall be mounted 1.4m above finished floor.
MTS Consulting Ltd
23
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
5.0
C43284
INTEGRATION WITH OTHER SERVICES
5.1
Lifts
The fire alarm panel shall, on receipt of any alarm, send a signal to all lifts. On receipt of
such signal, the lifts shall move to pre-assigned levels and stop functioning.
5.2
Fire Fighting System
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from any fire fighting system, the signal shall raise a
local fire alarm as well as an alarm on the main fire alarm panel. Different fire fighting
systems shall obviously have a different address and thus raise a separate alarm.
5.3
Generator
The generator set should a fire valve on the generator operate, a mercury switch on this
unit shall give a signal to the fire alarm panel that should be regarded as a fire signal.
5.4
Motorised Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be activated by means of a fire signal from the Fire Alarm System
Panel. Closure of fire dampers will depend on the programming of the system whether
zones shall be applied or whether the system will shut down all dampers together.
5.5
Mechanical Fire Dampers
Mechanical fire dampers which are operated by heat rather than a fire alarm signal shall
have an I/O device to monitor their state and relay it to the fire alarm panels. Where
possible, fire dampers shall be grouped and wired onto a single I/O device.
5.6
HRU’s / Air conditioning systems
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from the protected areas, the units shall automatically
be switched off. Units will not switch on automatically and must be manually reset by the
user.
5.7
Access Control Doors
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal, doors controlled by the access control system and
which are on the predetermined escape route shall be released in order to facilitate
evacuation.
5.8
Gas Suppression Clear Agent system Interface
Upon receiving a fire alarm signal from the protected areas, the signal shall raise a local
fire alarm as well as in the main fire alarm panel.
MTS Consulting Ltd
24
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
6.0
C43284
AUDIO / VISUAL DEVICES
6.1
Detector base sounders
These sounders are to have a minimum sound level of 83dBA @ 1m.It shall be
compatible with the common base used for the detection devices and in turn be able to
plug a detector onto this sounder as on integral unit.
6.2
Strobe Light
Suitable for 24 volt D.C. operation. The high output strobe shall enhance the attention
getting function of the sounders in specific areas.
7.0
SHORT CIRCUIT ISOLATORS
A minimum number of three short circuit isolators are to be incorporated in the circuit per floor so
that any short circuit fault in cable or detector will not affect the remainder of the loop. Short circuit
isolators should be located where the wiring passes from one covered level to another. Should
detectors be fitted with an onboard isolator this item becomes superfluous and shall not be
required.
8.0
WIRING
Twin screened cable, 1.5mm section minimum, complying with CWZ category, PH30
classification of EN50200 and certified to maintain circuit integrity when simultaneously exposed
o
to 830 C and mechanical shock for 15 minutes followed by simultaneous exposure to water spray
and mechanical shock for a further 15 minutes.
Chased downdrops to devices at low level, wiring going around beams or areas where the wiring
needs additional protection shall be laid in 20mm self extinguishing PVC conduit. Approved
metallic saddles shall be used for horizontal runs of this conduit in order that the cable remains in
place even in case of fire.
9.0
LABELLING
All devices, whether detectors, call points sounders or interface units shall be labelled with loop
and device number.
10.0
VOIDS
Voids, should there be any, be it above the false ceiling or below the raised floor, especially
where electrical cables are present, should be protected by appropriate detectors. Special care
shall be taken with the positioning of detectors to ensure that the sensing element is positioned in
the top 10% of the void. Heat detectors should be placed in voids that may not be easily
reachable for maintenance or cleaning.
MTS Consulting Ltd
25
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
11.0
C43284
INTEGRATION WITH THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Prospective tenderers are to have a site visit arranged in order to gather the required information
on the existing system and its requirements. The contract is to include FULL networking with the
existing system in order that the security from the main control room would have all the
information required of the fire alarm panel status. This is not limited to the fire condition, but also
on the status of the individual accessories, detectors and interfaces. Contractors are also to keep
in mind that this existing system might be changed or upgraded in the near future.
During installation, disruption to the existing Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be kept to a
minimum and only in conformity to the Bank’s requirement. The contractor is to allow for such
disruptions to take place outside normal working hours.
MTS Consulting Ltd
26
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
SECTION V – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
SCOPE
The scope of the access control system is to prevent unauthorized entries to restricted areas. The
system software shall provide a hierarchal architectural system where access to restricted areas
are given accordingly by the Security manager through the system software
The performance and functions of the access control system shall be monitored and controlled
via proprietary software. The level of access rights given to end users shall be determined by the
client.
The Access Control system is to be connected with the Fire Alarm System in order that a fire
signal will release selected doors in the fire escape route or as required by the security section.
2.0
ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES
The access control system shall be equipped by two types of devices, namely proximity card and
or keypad or both.
However, the system should be capable to cater for other high tech devices without the need to
replace the structural cables, system software etc, if required in the future.
The functions for each access device are described in detail below:
2.1
Proximity Access Control
Users who are given unrestricted rights of access to certain areas are provided with
proximity card, to prevent others from accessing unauthorised areas. These systems
require the users to enter the proximity card into the card readers for entry/exit access.
Proximity cards should be programmable in order that particular employees or visitors
may have full access to particular areas but be restricted from entering others areas.
2.2
Keypad Control
The keypad control is to be equipped with a keypad with incorporated proximity card
reader. This control unit is to be vandal and weather proof. Each user will have his/her
individual code in order that personnel using this keypad are recorded in terms of identity,
time and date of entry or exit.
2.3
Door Switch Alarm
The magnetic contact door switch is the most common type of switch, which is used with
intruder alarm systems to monitor the building entrances.
MTS Consulting Ltd
27
Bank of Valletta - Sta. Venera, Fire Fighting & ELV Systems
C43284
The magnetic door contact shall trigger the alarm in the event that that the secured door
is accessed at unauthorised time. For safety and security reasons, it is not permitted to
use lock conditions on all fire exit routes, and the access control shall be configured to
aid the fire fighting team by recording the number of personnel, which left the building
and those who are still occupying the building during evacuation circumstances.
2.4
Door Release switch
The door locks are to be provided by others. It is preferable that the lock itself is
connected to the system and the door is released on opening the lock from the secure
side without the use of door release buttons. The contractor is however to allow for extra
door release buttons as indicated in the relative Bills of Quantities at a maximum of 3m
away from each controlled door.
3.0
VEHICULAR ACCESS
Vehicular access to the car-park shall be via access control, in conjunction with the access
control system of the whole complex. Once a signal is received from the access control system,
the rising arm barrier raised automatically. A ground loop shall be installed for cars on exit from
this area of the car park in order for the barrier to open automatically. Anti passback software
shall be installed on the system.
The rising arm barrier arm is to be constructed from re-enforced and resin bonded fibres, supplied
white with red bands. The rising are shall be articulated due to the headroom of the car park.
The linear actuator shall be heavy duty and shall provide an operating speed of approximately 6
seconds. An industrial grade strut is to provide additional counterbalancing and dampening, thus
giving a smooth operation.
The barrier shall have an integrally mounted 'control panel', containing power supply, isolator and
electrical components required for safe barrier operation. Provision shall be made to raise and
lower the barrier manually in case of power failure.
4.0
WIRING
All wiring shall be laid in 20 or 25mm PVC conduit as required. The contractor shall be
responsible for the installation of the whole system and no part of the installation shall be
procured by others.
5.0
LITERATURE AND TRAINING
Manufacturer's technical literature for all the components of the system shall be provided.
Adequate training in the operation of the system shall be given to the client's representative/s
before handing over the system.
MTS Consulting Ltd
28